Mazda Automobile 2008 Tribute HEV User Manual

Table of Contents  
Introduction  
4
Instrument Cluster  
20  
Warning lights and chimes  
Gauges  
20  
25  
Entertainment Systems  
27  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)  
Satellite radio information  
Navigation system  
35  
38  
41  
Climate Controls  
42  
Dual automatic temperature control  
Rear window defroster  
42  
46  
Lights  
47  
Headlamps  
Turn signal control  
Bulb replacement  
47  
51  
53  
Driver Controls  
58  
Windshield wiper/washer control  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Power windows  
Mirrors  
Cruise control  
Moon roof  
Message center  
58  
59  
64  
65  
69  
73  
74  
Locks and Security  
86  
Keys  
Locks  
Anti-theft system  
86  
87  
93  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Maintenance and Specifications  
247  
Engine compartment  
Engine oil  
Battery  
250  
253  
256  
Engine Coolant and Motor/Electronics Coolant  
Fuel information  
Air filter(s)  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities  
Engine data  
258  
264  
278  
281  
283  
Accessories  
286  
287  
Service Maintenance Section  
Normal scheduled maintenance and log  
Special operating conditions and log  
292  
299  
Index  
303  
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical  
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval  
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written  
authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and  
without incurring obligation.  
Copyright © 2007 MNAO  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning  
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and  
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in  
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer  
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL  
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt  
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material  
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
CONGRATULATIONS  
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda Tribute Hybrid. Please  
take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this  
handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the  
greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.  
For more information on Mazda Motor Corporation and its products visit  
the following website:  
In the United States: www.mazdausa.com  
In Canada: www.mazda.ca  
Additional owner information is given in separate publications or refer to  
the Mazda Importers/Distributors section in the Customer Assistance  
chapter.  
This Owner’s Manual describes every option and model variant available  
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your  
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe  
options before they are generally available.  
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Manual when reselling the vehicle. It  
is an integral part of the vehicle.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
WARNING: Fuel pump and high voltage battery shut-off  
switches: In the event of an accident the fuel pump shut-off  
switch may automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine  
and the high voltage shut-off switch cuts off power from the  
high voltage battery. These switches can also be activated  
through sudden vibration (e.g. collision when parking). For  
information on resetting the fuel pump shut-off switch and the  
high voltage battery shutoff switch, refer to the Fuel pump/high  
voltage shut-off switches in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION  
Warning symbols in this guide  
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In  
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments  
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be  
read and observed.  
Warning symbols on your vehicle  
When you see this symbol, it is  
imperative that you consult the  
relevant section of this guide before  
touching or attempting adjustment  
of any kind.  
Protecting the environment  
We must all play our part in  
protecting the environment. Correct  
vehicle usage and the authorized  
disposal of waste, cleaning and  
lubrication materials are significant  
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this  
guide with the tree symbol.  
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE  
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive  
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of  
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the  
moving parts a chance to break in.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a  
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to  
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since  
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the  
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil  
usage.  
HYBRID OPERATION  
The Hybrid is a whole new kind of SUV that combines electric and  
gasoline propulsion without compromise, to provide breakthrough  
performance and efficiency. It requires no special fuels and never has to  
be plugged in. Familiarizing yourself with these unique characteristics  
will help ensure optimal performance from your new vehicle.  
Normal vehicle operation  
Starting: Turn the ignition key to the START position while your vehicle  
is in Park (P). The gas engine will turn on, accompanied by the green  
“ready indicator” light. Your engine may shut off shortly after starting,  
depending on temperature and battery charge level. This is a natural  
part of your Hybrid’s fuel-saving features. The “ready indicator” light will  
stay on, and you do not need to restart the vehicle.  
Note: You may notice higher engine speeds upon start-up. This  
temporary condition is normal and necessary to heat up the cabin for  
occupant comfort.  
Driving: The gas engine automatically starts and stops to provide power  
when it’s needed and to save fuel when it’s not. While coasting at low  
speeds, coming to a stop, or standing, the gas engine normally shuts  
down and the vehicle operates in electric-only mode. Conditions that  
cause the engine to start up or remain running include:  
Driving request for moderate to rapid acceleration  
Vehicle speed above 40 mph (65 kph)  
Ascending a hill  
ECON mode not selected (while Climate Control is ON)  
Selection of climate control defrost mode or defrost/floor mode  
Charge level of high voltage battery is low  
Very high or low outside temperature (to provide system  
cooling/heating)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Stopping: The gas engine may shut off to conserve fuel as you come to  
a stop. Restarting the vehicle is not required. Simply step on the  
accelerator when you are ready to drive.  
Transmission Operation: Due to the technologically advanced,  
electronically controlled Continuously Variable Transaxle (eCVT) you will  
not feel shift changes like those of a non-hybrid vehicle. Your Hybrid’s  
transmission is designed to do its work seamlessly.  
Since your engine speed is controlled by the transmission, it may  
seem elevated at times. This is normal hybrid operation and helps  
deliver fuel efficiency and performance.  
Neutral: It is not recommended to idle the vehicle in (N) Neutral for  
extended periods of time because this will discharge your high voltage  
battery and decrease fuel economy. Also, the engine cannot provide  
power to the hybrid system in (N) Neutral.  
Low Gear: Low gear (L) is designed to mimic the enhanced engine  
braking available in non-hybrid vehicles. On long downhill grades, (L)  
Low gear may produce high engine speeds to provide necessary engine  
braking. This is normal and will not damage your vehicle. Response  
during acceleration should be the same as in the (D) Drive position.  
Reverse: (R) Reverse Gear vehicle speed is limited to 22 mph (35  
km/h).  
Unique Hybrid operating characteristics  
Your Hybrid, with its new technology, behaves differently compared to a  
non-hybrid. Here is a description of the major differences:  
Battery: Your Hybrid is equipped with a high voltage battery cooling  
system in the rear of the vehicle. A cool battery ensures battery life and  
provides the best possible performance. Your hybrid high voltage battery  
may periodically re-condition itself to ensure maximum efficiency. You  
may notice slight changes in drivability during this process, but it’s an  
important part of your Hybrid’s high voltage battery optimization  
features.  
You may hear a series of clicks from the cargo area when you first turn  
the key in the ignition. This sound is the high voltage contactors closing  
to allow you to start your hybrid.  
In addition, you may hear fan noise and a slight tapping sound from the  
rear as the vent door operates. This fan may continue to operate for  
short durations after the vehicle has been turned off. These noises are a  
customary part of hybrid operation and do not require service.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
If the vehicle is left inoperative for over 31 days, it may be necessary to  
jumpstart the vehicle. For more information, refer to Jump starting  
your (Low voltage [underhood] battery only) in the Roadside  
Emergencies chapter.  
Engine: The engine speed in your hybrid is not directly tied to your  
vehicle speed. Your vehicle’s engine and transmission are designed to  
deliver the power you need at the most efficient engine speed. During  
heavy accelerations, your hybrid may reach high engine speeds (up to  
6000 RPM). This is characteristic of the Atkinson cycle engine  
technology helping to maximize your hybrid’s fuel economy.  
In prolonged mountainous driving, you may see the engine tachometer  
changing without your input. This is intentional and maintains the  
battery charge level. You may also notice during extended downhill  
driving that your engine continues to run instead of shutting off.  
During this “engine braking”, the engine stays on, but it’s not using any  
fuel. You may also hear a slight whine or whistle when operating your  
vehicle. This is the normal operation of the electric generator in the  
hybrid system.  
During certain events (such as vehicle servicing) your low voltage  
(underhood) battery may become disconnected or disabled. When this  
occurs, and after reconnecting the low voltage (underhood) battery and  
driving the vehicle, the engine may continue to operate for 3-5 seconds  
after the key is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position. This is a normal  
condition, as the vehicle’s computers are relearning the operating  
characteristics of your particular engine in order to operate it at  
maximum efficiency.  
Braking: Your hybrid is equipped with standard hydraulic braking and  
regenerative braking. Regenerative braking is performed by your  
transmission and it captures brake energy and stores it in your high  
voltage battery.  
You may hear a pumping sound when you unlock or enter the vehicle  
and a venting sound a few minutes after shutting off the vehicle. This is  
the hydraulic portion of your regenerative braking system charging and  
discharging.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Driving to optimize fuel economy  
Your fuel economy should improve throughout your hybrid’s break-in  
period. As with any vehicle, fuel economy can be significantly impacted  
by your driving habits and accessory usage. For best results, keep in  
mind these tips:  
Tire Inflation: Keep tires properly inflated and only use recommended  
size.  
Climate Control: Your hybrid is equipped with an “ECON” button that  
offers a more fuel efficient operation of your automatic temperature  
control system.  
When activated, the “ECON” feature allows the engine to shut down at  
low speeds or when your vehicle is stopped.  
If cooler temperature is desired, the “ECON” button can be turned off,  
for better interior cooling but lower fuel economy.  
The “ECON” mode turns itself off when you select defrost or  
defrost/floor mode, although on cold days, you may still experience  
engine shut-down while in defrost or defrost/floor mode.  
Drive Habits: Aggressive driving increases the amount of energy  
required to move your vehicle. In general, better fuel economy is  
achieved with mild to moderate acceleration and deceleration. Moderate  
braking is particularly important since it allows you to maximize the  
energy captured by the regenerative braking system.  
NOTE: Having your engine running is not always an indication of  
inefficiency – in some cases it is actually more efficient than driving in  
electric mode.  
Additional Tips:  
Do not carry extra loads  
Be mindful of adding external accessories that may increase  
aerodynamic drag  
Observe posted speed limits  
Perform all scheduled maintenance  
There is no need to wait for your engine to “warm up”. The vehicle is  
ready to drive immediately after starting  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Frequently asked questions  
Question  
Answer  
What is the pumping sound I hear This is the hydraulic portion of  
when I unlock or enter the vehicle, your regenerative braking system  
and the venting sound a few  
minutes after shutting off my  
vehicle?  
pressurizing and depressurizing.  
You may also hear it occasionally  
after pressing the brake pedal.  
What are the series of clicks from The high voltage battery is  
the cargo area when I first turn  
the key in the ignition?  
electrically isolated from the rest  
of the vehicle when the key is  
OFF. When the key is turned ON,  
high voltage contactors inside the  
battery are closed to make the  
electricity available to the  
motor/generator and enable the  
vehicle to drive. The clicks are the  
sound of these contactors as they  
close and open during start up and  
shut down.  
Why does the engine always start Your engine is started at key-on  
at key-on?  
because the emission components  
need to be warm in order to  
minimize tailpipe emissions, and in  
cooler climates for cabin heating  
and windshield defrost  
performance.  
After I start my car in the  
morning, why does it take a long  
time before the engine shuts  
down?  
There are several reasons the  
engine stays on for an extended  
amount of time when it is first  
started. One common reason is to  
ensure that the emissions  
components are warm enough to  
minimize tailpipe emissions. As the  
climate gets cooler, this  
“engine-ON” time is extended.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Question  
Answer  
Why does my engine never shut  
down above 40 mph (64 km/h)?  
The engine is required to turn on  
above this speed to protect the  
transaxle hardware.  
Why does my engine stay ON  
In order to ensure that the climate  
when it’s extremely cold outside? control system can begin heating  
the cabin and/or defrosting the  
windshield as soon as a driver  
requests it, the engine coolant  
temperature has to be kept  
sufficiently hot. Keeping the  
engine on is required to maintain  
the correct minimum temperature.  
Why does my engine rev up so  
Your vehicle’s engine and  
high sometimes when I accelerate? transmission are designed to  
deliver the power you need at the  
most efficient engine speed. This  
may be higher than expected  
during heavy accelerations, and  
may fluctuate during steady state  
driving. These are characteristics  
of the Atkinson engine cycle and  
the eCVT transaxle technology  
that help maximize your hybrid’s  
fuel economy.  
What does it mean when my  
power assist gauge moves to the  
right? To the left?  
Electricity is coming out of the  
battery when the gauge moves to  
the right. Electricity is going into  
the battery when the gauge moves  
to the left.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Question  
Answer  
What is the fan noise and slight  
The fan noise comes from two fans  
tapping sound I hear from the rear located inside the high voltage  
of my hybrid?  
battery. These fans turn on when  
the battery requires cooling air.  
The fan speed, and associated  
noise level, will change according  
to the amount of cooling required  
to maintain good performance.  
How far can I go in Electric Drive Running out of gas is not  
if I run out of gas?  
recommended. However, you may  
be able to go about one mile,  
driving at 30 mph (48 km/h), if the  
battery has a normal state of  
charge.  
What is the engine oil change  
service interval?  
The engine oil should be changed  
every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)  
under normal operating conditions.  
See the Scheduled maintenance  
guide chapter.  
Can I put E10 or E85 in my  
vehicle, and how will it affect my  
fuel economy?  
Your hybrid vehicle can use E10  
(10% ethanol, 90% gasoline) fuel,  
but you may notice slightly  
reduced fuel economy because  
ethanol contains less energy per  
gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid  
vehicle is not designed to use E85  
(85% ethanol).  
How long will my high voltage  
battery last? Does it need  
maintenance?  
The high voltage battery system is  
designed to last the life of the  
vehicle and requires no  
maintenance.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Question  
Answer  
Can you charge the battery with a There are no provisions for  
plug into an A/C outlet?  
charging the high voltage battery  
from a power supply external to  
the vehicle.  
What is the purpose of the ECON ECON mode may provide  
button?  
improved fuel economy by  
preventing the gasoline engine  
from running for the sole purpose  
of providing air conditioning. When  
the engine turns off, the A/C  
compressor does not operate and  
warm air may come out of the  
vents. In ECON mode, A/C  
operates as normal when the  
gasoline engine is running.  
Yes. Your hybrid vehicle can be  
“flat-towed” without modification.  
See the Recreational Towing  
section in the Tires, Wheels and  
Loading chapter for more  
Can I tow the hybrid behind my  
motor home with all four wheels  
down?  
information.  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by  
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty  
Information Booklet that is provided to you along with your Owner’s  
Manual.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special instructions  
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic  
controls.  
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag supplemental  
restraint system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints  
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions  
could result in personal injury.  
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats  
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.  
Service Data Recording  
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and  
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially  
includes information about the performance or status of various systems  
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake  
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Mazda  
Motor Corporation, Mazda Canada, and service and repair facilities may  
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your  
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.  
Event Data Recording  
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of  
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The  
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.  
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the  
occupants, potentially including information such as:  
how various systems in your vehicle were operating;  
whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;  
how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the  
brake pedal;  
how fast the vehicle was traveling; and  
where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected  
to the recording modules. Mazda Motor Corporation and Mazda Canada  
do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,  
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,  
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful  
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information  
independently of Mazda Motor Corporation and Mazda Canada.  
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles.  
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual  
carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of  
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of  
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.  
Using your vehicle with a snowplow  
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.  
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.  
Using your vehicle as an ambulance  
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.  
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Mazda Ambulance Preparation  
Package.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Safety Alert  
See Owner’s Manual  
Fasten Seat Belt  
Airbag - Side  
Protecting the  
Environment  
Airbag - Front  
Child Seat Lower  
Anchor  
Passenger Airbag Off  
Child Seat Tether  
Anchor  
Brake System  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Parking Brake System  
Brake Fluid -  
Non-Petroleum Based  
Parking Aid System  
Stability Control System  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
Fuse Compartment  
Master Lighting Switch  
Fog Lamps-Front  
Fuel Pump Reset  
Windshield  
Defrost/Demist  
Windshield Wash/Wipe  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Rear Window  
Defrost/Demist  
Power Windows  
Personal Alarm System  
Feature  
Power Window Lockout  
Engine Oil  
Engine Coolant  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature  
Do Not Open When Hot  
Avoid Smoking, Flames,  
or Sparks  
Battery  
Battery Acid  
Fan Warning  
Explosive Gas  
Power Steering Fluid  
MAX  
MIN  
Maintain Correct Fluid  
Level  
Service Engine Soon  
Engine Air Filter  
Speed Control  
Jack  
Passenger Compartment  
Air Filter  
Low Tire Pressure  
Warning  
Check Fuel Cap  
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.  
Mazda may change the contents without notice.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Instrument cluster  
(pg. 20)  
Multi-function lever  
(pg. 58)  
Hazard flasher control  
(pg. 202)  
Headlamp  
control  
(pg. 47)  
Steering wheel controls*  
(pg. 72)  
Speed controls*  
(pg. 69)  
Hood release  
(pg. 249)  
Parking brake release  
(pg. 189)  
* if equipped  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Climate controls  
(pg. 42)  
Audio system  
(pg. 27)  
Auxiliary input jack  
(pg. 35)  
Auxiliary power point  
(pg. 61)  
*if equipped  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES  
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a safety hazard or a vehicle  
condition that may become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A  
warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your  
vehicle’s functions. Many lights will illuminate when you start your  
vehicle to make sure the bulbs work. If any light remains on after  
starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light for  
additional information.  
Service engine soon: The Service  
engine soon indicator light  
illuminates when the ignition is first  
turned to the ON position to check  
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ЉService engine soonЉ  
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no  
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ЉService  
engine soonЉ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not  
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance  
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board  
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On  
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could  
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid  
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced  
immediately by your authorized dealer.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust  
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel  
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components,  
possibly causing a fire.  
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when  
the fuel cap may not be properly  
installed. Continued driving with  
this light on may cause the Service  
engine soon warning light to come  
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the  
Maintenance and Specification chapter.  
Brake system warning light: To  
confirm the brake system warning  
light is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the RUN  
!
P
BRAKE  
position (when the engine is not running), or in a position between RUN  
and START, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned  
to the RUN position. If the brake system warning light does not  
illuminate at this time, seek service immediately from your authorized  
dealer. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake  
fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by  
your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning  
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking  
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the  
vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.  
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can  
cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.  
Anti-lock brake system: If the  
ABS light stays illuminated or  
ABS  
continues to flash, a malfunction has  
been detected, have the system  
serviced immediately by your  
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake  
warning light also is illuminated.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Airbag readiness: If this light fails  
to illuminate when the ignition is  
turned to RUN, continues to flash or  
remains on, have the system  
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound  
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been  
detected.  
Seat belt: Reminds you to fasten  
your seat belt. A Belt-Minder  
chime will also sound to remind you  
to fasten your seat belt. Refer to the  
Seating and safety restraints  
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minderchime feature.  
Master vehicle electrical hazard  
warning lamp: Indicates Hybrid  
component fault/failure that will  
cause the vehicle to shutdown or  
fail to start.  
WARNING: If the vehicle is still running, the vehicle may soon  
shutdown without further warning and should be stopped safely.  
If this lamp is lit, stop the vehicle, shift to P (Park), turn the key to the  
Off position, and attempt to restart the vehicle. If the fault remains, the  
vehicle may require refueling, jump starting, resetting of the shut-off  
switches, or service. For information regarding Low voltage  
[underhood] battery only) and Fuel pump/High voltage shut-off  
switches please refer to the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
Ready indicator light: Illuminates  
once the vehicle has successfully  
started. Indicates the vehicle is  
ready to drive even when you don’t  
hear the engine running.  
Charging system: Illuminates when  
the 12V charging system is not  
working properly.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates  
when the oil pressure falls below the  
normal range, refer to Engine oil in  
the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
Engine or motor electronic  
coolant temperature: Illuminates  
when the coolant temperature  
exceeds the threshold. When the light is flashing or remains on, stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to  
Engine coolant and motor/electronics coolant in the Maintenance  
and Specifications chapter.  
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding  
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot.  
ABS active/Traction control™  
active (if equipped): Flashes  
when the ABS system is active. If  
the light remains on, have the  
system serviced immediately, refer  
to the Driving chapter for more  
information.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
Illuminates when your tire pressure  
is low. If the light remains ON at  
start up or while driving, the tire  
pressure should be checked. Refer  
to Inspecting and Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and  
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to RUN, the light will  
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does  
not turn ON or begins to flash, have the system inspected by your  
authorized dealer. For more information on this system, refer to  
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,  
Wheels and Loading chapter.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel  
level in the fuel tank is at or near  
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this  
chapter).  
Speed control: Illuminates when  
the speed control is engaged. Turns  
off when the speed control system  
is disengaged.  
Anti-theft system: Flashes when  
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft  
System has been activated.  
Throttle control/Powertrain:  
Illuminates when a powertrain fault  
has been detected. Contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Door ajar: Illuminates when the  
ignition is in the RUN position and  
any door is open.  
Turn signal: Illuminates when the  
left or right turn signal or the  
hazard lights are turned on. If the  
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.  
High beams: Illuminates when the  
high beam headlamps are turned on.  
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the  
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door  
is opened.  
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking  
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the  
driver’s door is opened.  
Parking brake ON chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left ON  
and the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is  
off, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Transmission not in park chime: Sounds when the PRNDL is not in P  
(Park) position, the driver’s door is ajar and the ignition is in the RUN  
position.  
HEV Engine off Reminder Chime: Sounds for 10 seconds when the  
PRNDL is in the P (Park) position and the Driver’s door is ajar (open)  
while ignition is in the RUN position. Always turn your ignition key to Off  
and remove key before leaving your vehicle. (The engine may be off  
when the vehicle is stopped, yet the key is on, and the engine can turn  
on at any time)  
Message center activation chime: Sounds when a warning message  
(except PARKING BRAKE ENGAGED while parked) appears in the  
message center display for the first time.  
GAUGES  
Speedometer: Indicates the  
current vehicle speed.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Battery gauge: Provides  
information about the vehicle’s  
energy usage.  
ASSIST — Battery provides extra  
power to boost the vehicle’s  
acceleration.  
CHARGE — Storing extra energy in the battery when coasting or  
slowing down.  
Odometer: Registers the total miles  
(kilometers) of the vehicle.  
Refer to Message Center in the  
Driver Controls chapter on how to  
switch the display from Metric to  
English.  
Trip odometer: Registers the miles  
(kilometers) of individual journeys.  
To reset, press and release the  
message center INFO button until  
TRIP A mode appears in the display.  
Press the control again to select the  
TRIP B feature. Press and hold the RESET button to reset.  
Tachometer: Indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute.  
Driving with your tachometer  
pointer continuously at the top of  
the scale may damage the engine.  
The pointer will indicate engine  
RPMs when the engine is running  
and point at the EV symbol when  
the engine is off and the vehicle is running on pure electrical power.  
Fuel gauge: Indicates  
approximately how much fuel is left  
in the fuel tank (when the ignition  
is in the ON position). The fuel  
gauge may vary slightly when the  
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.  
Refer to Filling the tank in the  
Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter for more information.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
AUDIO SYSTEMS  
AM/FM/single CD/in-dash CD6/MP3 satellite compatible sound  
system  
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With  
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)  
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until  
either front door is opened.  
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with  
a unique audio system. If your  
display shows six small circles in the  
display, your audio system is a CD6  
system. If not, your system is a  
Single CD system.  
1. EJECT: For a single CD  
system, press EJECT to eject  
the CD.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
For a CD6 system, press EJECT and select the desired CD slot by  
pressing the corresponding memory preset #. The display will read  
EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will  
read REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD  
the system will reload the disc.  
To auto eject all loaded discs, press and hold EJECT. The system  
will eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them.  
2. MEMORY PRESETS:In radio  
mode, to set a station, select  
the desired frequency band, AM,  
FM1 or FM2. Tune to the  
desired station. Press and hold a  
preset button until sound returns and PRESET # SAVED appears in  
the display. You can save up to 30 stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and  
FM2.  
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select tracks or desired folders.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 30 available presets,  
10 each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your  
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a  
preset control until sound returns.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio  
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
3. CLOCK: To set the time, press  
CLOCK. The display will read  
SET TIME. Use the memory  
preset #s to enter in the desired time, hours and minutes. The clock  
will then begin from that time.  
4. SOUND: Press repeatedly to  
cycle through the following  
features:  
BASS: Press SOUND repeatedly to reach the bass setting.  
Press  
TREBLE: Press SOUND repeatedly to reach the treble setting.  
Press SEEK/TRACK to adjust the level of treble.  
BALANCE: Press SOUND repeatedly to reach the balance setting.  
Press SEEK/TRACK to adjust the audio between the left (L) and  
SEEK/TRACK  
to adjust the level of bass.  
right (R) speakers.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
FADE: Press SOUND repeatedly to reach the fade setting.  
Press SEEK/TRACK to adjust the audio between the back (B)  
and front (F) speakers.  
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME (if equipped): Press SOUND  
repeatedly to reach the SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME setting. Radio  
volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to  
compensate for road and wind noise. Use  
adjust.  
SEEK/TRACK  
to  
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change  
the volume level.  
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest  
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with  
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.  
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7  
is the maximum setting.  
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode, if equipped): Press SOUND repeatedly  
to reach the Occupancy mode setting. Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to  
select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR  
SEATS.  
5. TUNE: In radio mode, turn  
right / left to go up / down the  
frequency band in individual  
increments.  
In satellite radio mode (if  
equipped), turn right / left to go to  
the next / previous available SIRIUS  
satellite station.  
6. MENU: Press repeatedly to  
access the following features:  
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (late availability — if equipped): Press  
MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter  
into the satellite radio menu. Press  
following options:  
/
to cycle through the  
CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press  
/
to  
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,  
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that  
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select  
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.  
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.  
SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in  
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,  
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is  
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with  
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and  
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You  
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20  
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the  
saved titles and press  
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When  
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,  
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.  
DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s  
memory. Press  
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the  
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.  
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again  
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to  
delete the currently listed song, press  
RETURN or CANCEL.  
/
to select either  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the  
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to  
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL  
DELETED.  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable  
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are  
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)  
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The  
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have  
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE  
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio  
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
AUTO PRESET ON/OFF: Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to toggle  
between ON/OFF. Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for  
AM/FM1/FM2. To activate the autoset feature, toggle AUTOSET to ON,  
and either wait five seconds for the search to initiate or press OK to  
immediately initiate the search. (If you press another control within  
those five seconds, the search will not initiate. ) The 10 strongest  
stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing.  
If there are less than 10 strong stations, the system will store the last  
one in the remaining presets.  
RDS ON/OFF: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to  
search RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:  
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.  
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in  
the display. Use  
SEEK/TRACK  
to toggle RDS ON/OFF. When  
RDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or  
view the station name or type.  
To change categories: Press MENU until RDS ON appears in the  
display. Press CAT. Press  
/
until the desired category appears in  
the display. Then press  
SEEK/TRACK to find the next station  
playing that category of music or SCAN for a brief sampling of all  
stations playing that category of music.  
COMPRESSION: Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press MENU until  
COMPRESSION ON/OFF appears in the display. Use  
SEEK/TRACK  
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the  
soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.  
7. TEXT: In MP3 mode, press  
TEXT repeatedly to view Album  
(AL), Folder (FL), Song (SO)  
and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to display  
the artist and song title. While in TEXT MODE, press again to scroll  
through the Artist (AR), Song (SO), Channel (CH) and Category (CA).  
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be  
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then  
press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to view the additional display text.  
8. AUX: Press AUX to access  
LINE (auxiliary audio mode).  
For location and further  
information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to Auxiliary input jack  
later in this chapter.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
9. SAT (Satellite Radio, if equipped): Press SAT to access satellite  
radio mode, if equipped. Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1,  
SAT2 and SAT3 modes.  
10. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3  
mode. If a disc is already loaded  
into the system, CD/MP3 play  
will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will  
appear in the display.  
11. AM/FM: Press repeatedly to  
select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency  
band.  
12. SEEK/TRACK: In radio  
mode, press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to access  
the previous/next strong radio  
station.  
In CD/MP3 mode, press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to access the previous/next track.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to  
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,  
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press SEEK/TRACK to seek to the  
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold  
SEEK/TRACK to fast seek through the previous/next channels.  
In Category mode, press SEEK/TRACK to select a category.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
13. CAT (Category) / FOLD  
(Folder):  
In Category mode, use to  
select from various music categories. To change RDS categories,  
ensure that RDS is ON in the Menu listing. Press MENU again until  
RDS ON appears in the display. Press CAT. PRESS UP OR DOWN TO  
CHANGE RDS CATEGORY will appear in the display. Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to scroll through all possible categories. When  
the desired category appears in the display, press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a  
brief sampling of all stations playing that category of music.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
In MP3 mode, press FOLD and then press  
/
to access the  
previous/next folder.  
In satellite radio mode (early availability — if equipped), use to  
select from various satellite radio categories. To change categories in  
satellite radio mode, press CAT/FOLD. The active category will appear in  
the display. Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
or turn the TUNE knob  
left/right to scroll through the available categories. Press and hold SCAN  
for a brief sampling of all channels in that category or press SEEK to  
seek to the next channel in that category.  
In satellite radio mode (late availability — if equipped), press to  
toggle between turning the most recently selected satellite radio category  
on or off. The category icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a  
specific category is selected (the icon will not illuminate during  
CATEGORY ALL). If no category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY  
SELECTED will display.  
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.  
Refer to Satellite radio menu under MENU for further information on  
selecting a satellite radio category.  
14. ON/OFF/VOL (Volume): Press  
to turn ON/OFF. Turn to  
increase/decrease volume.  
Note: If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening  
level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
15. SHUFFLE:  
In CD and MP3 mode,press  
SHUFFLE to engage shuffle  
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display. If you wish to engage  
shuffle mode right away, press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to begin  
random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current  
track is finished playing. SHUFFLE and the track # will appear in the  
display.  
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in  
the display.  
For a single CD system, the system will shuffle within the current  
disc.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
For a CDX6 system, the system will shuffle between all loaded discs.  
The disc # will appear in the top left hand corner of the display.  
16. SCAN: In radio mode, press  
for a brief sampling of all strong  
radio stations.  
In CD/MP3 mode, press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the  
current disc or folder.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SCAN for a brief  
sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels. If a specific category  
is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press SCAN for a brief sampling of  
all available SIRIUS satellite channels within the selected Category.  
17. DIRECT: Press to access a  
desired radio station, track, MP3  
folder or SIRIUS satellite  
channel (if equipped).  
In radio mode, press DIRECT and then press the desired radio  
frequency (i.e. 101.1) using the memory presets.  
In CD mode, press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK  
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the  
numbered controls. The system will then begin playing that track.  
In MP3 folder mode, press DIRECT and the number of the desired  
folder. The system will advance to that specific folder.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press DIRECT then enter  
the desired channel (i.e. 002) using the memory presets. If you only  
enter one digit, press OK and the system will go to that satellite  
channel. If you enter three digits, the system will automatically go to  
that channel, if available. You may cancel your entry by pressing  
DIRECT. If an invalid station number is entered, INVALID CHANNEL  
will appear in the display and the system will continue playing the  
current station.  
18. LOAD: For a single CD  
system, this control is not  
operational. To load a CD,  
simply insert the disc label side up into the CD slot.  
For a CD6 system, press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT  
SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6.  
When the display reads LOAD CD#, load the desired disc, label side  
up. If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds, the system will  
choose for you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.  
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display  
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert  
the discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded,  
the disc in preset #1 will begin to play.  
19. CD slot: For a single CD  
system, insert a CD/MP3, label  
side up.  
For a CD6 system, press LOAD and select a CD slot using the  
memory presets. When prompted by the system, insert a CD/MP3  
label side up.  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)  
Your vehicle is equipped with an  
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The  
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way  
to connect your portable music  
player to the in-vehicle audio  
system. This allows the audio from a  
portable music player to be played  
through the vehicle speakers with  
high fidelity. To achieve optimal  
performance, please observe the  
following instructions when  
attaching your portable music  
device to the audio system.  
Required equipment:  
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones  
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)  
connectors at each end  
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:  
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.  
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully  
charged and that the device is turned off.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone  
output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable  
to the AIJ in your vehicle.  
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded  
into the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.  
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the  
volume.  
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in  
the display.  
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it  
may be low.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to  
Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your  
Navigation supplement.  
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the  
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between  
the AUX and FM or CD controls.  
Troubleshooting:  
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level  
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not  
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with  
devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.  
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is  
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio  
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality.  
Many portable music players have different output levels, so not all  
players should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound  
best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.  
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the  
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace  
or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.  
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same way  
manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide  
control (play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.  
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your  
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is  
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure  
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the  
vehicle is in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough  
to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the  
vehicle is in motion.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION  
Radio frequencies:  
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications  
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:  
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz  
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz  
Radio reception factors:  
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:  
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the  
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,  
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal  
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency  
is displayed.  
CD/CD player care  
Do:  
Handle discs by their edges only.  
(Never touch the playing  
surface).  
Inspect discs before playing.  
Clean only with an approved CD  
cleaner.  
Wipe discs from the center out.  
Don’t:  
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods  
of time.  
Clean using a circular motion.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in  
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical  
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact  
discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players.  
Do not use any irregular shaped  
CDs or discs with a scratch  
protection film attached.  
CDs with homemade paper  
(adhesive) labels should not be  
inserted into the CD player as  
the label may peel and cause the  
CD to become jammed. It is  
recommended that homemade  
CDs be identified with  
permanent felt tip marker rather  
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please  
contact your authorized dealer for further information.  
Audio system warranty and service  
Refer to the Warranty Information Booklet for audio system warranty  
information. If service is necessary, see your authorized Mazda  
dealership.  
Satellite radio information (if equipped)  
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,  
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For  
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,  
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in  
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.  
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the  
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an  
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio  
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite  
radio reception performance:  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the  
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other  
material as far away from the antenna as possible.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway  
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can  
interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating  
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an  
audio mute.  
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is  
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO  
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.  
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription  
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and  
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive  
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:  
Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of  
sale or lease of the vehicle.  
Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels  
over the internet (U.S. customers only).  
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474.  
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add  
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular  
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.  
Mazda Motor Corporation shall not be responsible for any such  
programming changes.  
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit  
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your  
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating  
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on  
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
ACQUIRING  
Condition  
Action Required  
No action required.  
This message should  
disappear shortly.  
Radio requires more  
than two seconds to  
produce audio for the  
selected channel.  
Internal module or  
system failure  
SAT FAULT  
If this message does  
not clear within a short  
period of time, or with  
an ignition key cycle,  
your receiver may have  
a fault. See your  
present.  
authorized dealer for  
service.  
INVALID CHNL  
Channel no longer  
available.  
This previously  
available channel is no  
longer available. Tune  
to another channel. If  
the channel was one of  
your presets, you may  
choose another channel  
for that preset button.  
Contact SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474 to  
subscribe to the  
UNSUBSCRIBED  
NO TEXT  
Subscription not  
available for this  
channel.  
channel or tune to  
another channel.  
Artist information not Artist information not  
available.  
available at this time on  
this channel. The  
system is working  
properly.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
NO TEXT  
Condition  
Action Required  
Song title information Song title information  
not available.  
not available at this  
time on this channel.  
The system is working  
properly.  
NO TEXT  
Category information  
not available.  
Category information  
not available at this  
time on this channel.  
The system is working  
properly.  
NO SIGNAL  
Loss of signal from  
the SIRIUS satellite or  
SIRIUS tower to the  
vehicle antenna.  
You are in a location  
that is blocking the  
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,  
tunnel, under an  
overpass, dense foliage,  
etc). The system is  
working properly. When  
you move into an open  
area, the signal should  
return.  
UPDATING  
Update of channel  
programming in  
progress.  
No action required. The  
process may take up to  
three minutes.  
CALL SIRIUS  
1–888–539–7474  
Satellite service has  
been deactivated by  
SIRIUS Satellite  
Radio.  
Call SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474 to  
re-activate or resolve  
subscription issues.  
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the  
Navigation supplement for further information.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL  
1. AUTO/Driver temperature: Press to engage full automatic  
operation. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow  
distribution, A/C on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or  
cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature. Turn to  
increase/decrease the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle.  
The control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when PASS  
TEMP is disengaged. The recommended initial setting is between  
72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for comfort. The driver  
side temperature setting will appear in the upper left corner of the  
display. The engine may run continuously to provide A/C operation  
unless ECON mode is selected. Selecting ECON mode affects A/C  
operation. Refer to ECON information later in this section.  
R
2.  
3.  
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window  
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for  
more information.  
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster  
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog  
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to  
reduce window fogging. On days where the outside temperature is  
approximately freezing or higher, the engine will run continuously in  
this mode. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow  
selection or press AUTO to return to automatic operation.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
4.  
5.  
Defrost/Floor: Distributes air through the windshield defroster  
vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The  
system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window  
fogging. On days where the outside temperature is approximately  
freezing or higher, the engine will run continuously in this mode.  
Power/  
: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control  
system. When the system is off, outside air is shut out. Turn to  
manually increase/decrease the fan speed. The manual fan speed  
setting will appear on the left side of the display. To return to  
automatic fan operation, press AUTO.  
6.  
7.  
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.  
Panel/Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel  
vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.  
8.  
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents  
and rear seat floor vents.  
9. Passenger temperature: Press to engage/disengage separate  
passenger side temperature control. Turn to increase/decrease the  
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle. The recommended  
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust  
for comfort. The passenger side temperature setting will appear in  
the upper right corner of the display.  
10.  
Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Press to  
activate/deactivate the passenger heated seat. See Heated seats in  
the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
11.  
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air  
recirculation in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount  
of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle, may reduce  
the energy needed to keep the interior of the vehicle cool, and may  
also help reduce undesired outside odors from reaching the interior  
of the vehicle. Recirculated air is controlled automatically when  
AUTO is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode  
except  
(defrost). Recirculated air may turn off automatically in  
some airflow modes to reduce window fogging potential. When the  
ignition switch is turned off and back on, the climate system will  
return to the recirculated air mode only if the A/C button LED is  
illuminated and the air distribution selection is either  
AUTO,  
(panel) or  
(panel/floor).  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
12. ECON: Press to activate/deactivate economy air conditioning  
operation. ECON mode may provide improved fuel economy by  
preventing the gasoline engine from running for the sole purpose of  
providing A/C. When the gas engine turns off, the A/C compressor  
does not operate to cool the cabin and comfort may be reduced. In  
ECON mode, A/C operates as normal when the gasoline engine is  
running. To prioritize cooling comfort over fuel economy, deactivate  
ECON. ECON can not be selected in  
(floor/defrost).  
(defrost) or  
13. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with  
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.  
Engages automatically in AUTO,  
(defrost)  
and (floor/defrost). Selecting ECON mode affects A/C operation.  
Refer to ECON information previously in this section.  
14.  
Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Press to  
activate/adjective the driver heated seat. See Heated seats in the  
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
Outside temperature: The outside temperature will appear in the  
display and is labeled EXT TEMP.  
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,  
refer to Setup menu in the Message center section of the Driver  
Controls chapter.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,  
select  
(defrost) or  
(floor/defrost).  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the  
system OFF or with (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats by blocking the air from the rear seat floor  
vents.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open  
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
For maximum cooling performance:  
Automatic operation:  
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.  
2. Do not override A/C or  
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).  
Make sure ECON mode is deactivated.  
Manual operation:  
(recirculated air).  
1. Select A/C.  
2. Select  
3. Select  
or  
.
(recirculated air) to provide colder airflow.  
4. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).  
5. Set highest fan setting initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.  
Make sure ECON mode is deactivated.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Select A/C.  
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument  
panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or  
sudden stop.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERR  
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and  
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.  
The ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position to operate the rear window  
defroster.  
R
Press  
to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light on  
the button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster turns  
off automatically after approximately 15 minutes. If a low battery  
condition is detected or the ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) or 2  
(ACC) position, the rear window defroster will not function. To manually  
R
turn off the rear window defroster at any time, press  
again.  
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,  
the same button will activate both. Refer to Heated outside mirrors in  
the Driver Controls chapter.  
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside  
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside or the  
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and  
will not be covered by your warranty.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
HEADLAMP CONTROL  
Rotate the headlamp control to the  
first position  
to turn on the  
parking lamps. Rotate to the second  
position  
to turn on the  
headlamps.  
Autolamp control (if equipped)  
The autolamp system provides light  
sensitive automatic on-off control of  
the exterior lights normally  
controlled by the headlamp control.  
The autolamp system is factory  
programmed to keep the lights on  
for 20 seconds after the ignition  
switch is turned to off. This delay  
can be programmed, using the  
procedure listed below, to any value  
up to 180 seconds. If equipped, this  
delay can also be programmed through the message center  
To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.  
To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.  
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the  
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield  
wipers are turned on (for a fixed period of time) the exterior lamps will  
turn on with headlamp control in the Autolamp position.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Autolamp delay system (if equipped)  
If your vehicle is equipped with autolamps, you can set the delay time to  
keep the headlights on for up to three minutes after the key is turned  
OFF. The delay time is set to 20 seconds at the factory, but the delay  
time may be changed by following the steps below (Steps 1 through 6  
must be done within 10 seconds):  
1. Turn the key to the 1 (LOCK)  
position.  
2. Rotate the headlamp control to  
the autolamp position.  
3. Rotate the headlamp control to  
the OFF position.  
4. Turn the key to the 3 (RUN)  
position.  
5. Turn the key back to the 1  
(LOCK) position.  
6. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position (the headlights  
should turn on).  
7. Turn the headlamp control to the OFF position when the desired  
delay time (up to 3 minutes) has been reached.  
Foglamp control (if equipped)  
The headlamp control also operates  
the foglamps. The foglamps can be  
turned on when the headlamp  
control is in the  
,
or  
positions and the high beams are  
not turned on.  
Pull headlamp control towards you  
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp  
indicator light  
will illuminate.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
High beams  
Push the lever toward the  
instrument panel to activate. Pull  
the lever towards you to deactivate.  
Flash to pass  
Pull toward you slightly to activate  
and release to deactivate.  
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)  
Turns the lowbeam headlamps on with a reduced output.  
To activate:  
the ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position.  
the headlamp control must be in the OFF, parking lamps or autolamp  
position.  
the transmission is not in P (Park),  
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at  
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp  
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally  
may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions.  
Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may  
result in a collision.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL  
Use to adjust the brightness of the  
instrument panel and all applicable  
switches in the vehicle during  
headlamp and parklamp operation.  
Move the control to the full upright  
position, past detent, to turn on the  
interior lamps.  
Rotate to full down position (past  
detent) to prevent interior lamps  
from illuminating when the doors  
are opened.  
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is  
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer  
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.  
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting  
conditions.  
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS  
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.  
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps  
should be checked by your authorized dealer.  
Vertical aim adjustment  
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level  
surface, approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.  
(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)  
(2) Center height of lamp to  
ground  
(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)  
(4) Horizontal reference line  
2. Measure the height from the  
center of your headlamp to the  
ground and mark an 8 foot  
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference  
line on the vertical wall or  
screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works well). The  
center of the lamp is marked by a 3.0 mm circle on the headlamp  
lens.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen  
and open the hood. Cover the left-hand headlamp with an opaque  
cloth.  
4. On the wall or screen you will  
observe a light pattern with a  
distinct horizontal edge of high  
intensity light towards the right.  
If this edge is not at the  
horizontal reference line, the  
beam will need to be adjusted.  
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on  
the headlamp, then use a 4 mm  
socket to turn the adjuster  
either counterclockwise (to  
adjust up) or clockwise (to  
adjust down) aligning the upper  
edge of the light pattern to the  
horizontal line.  
6. Move the opaque cloth to cover  
the right-hand headlamp and  
repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the  
left-hand headlamp.  
7. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS  
NON-ADJUSTABLE.  
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.  
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL  
Push down to activate the left  
turn signal.  
Push up to activate the right turn  
signal.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
INTERIOR LAMPS  
Dome lamps and map lamps  
The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and  
passenger seats.  
The dome lamp control has three  
positions:  
OFF: In this position, the lamp  
will not illuminate.  
DOOR: In this position, the dome  
lamp will illuminate only when a  
door is opened and will remain  
illuminated for 25 seconds after  
the door is shut.  
ON: In this position, the lamp will remain illuminated.  
The map lamp controls (without  
moon roof) are located on the dome  
lamp. Press the button on either  
side of each map lamp to illuminate  
the lamps. Push the button again to  
turn off the lamps.  
For models equipped with a moon  
roof, the map lamps are located on  
the moon roof control panel. Press  
the button on either side of each  
map lamp to illuminate the lamps.  
Push the button again to turn off  
the lamps.  
The map lamps will illuminate  
whenever a door is opened. After  
the door is shut, the lamps will remain illuminated for 25 seconds.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Cargo and dome lamp  
Rear cargo lamp equipped with an  
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light  
when:  
the doors are closed and the  
control is in the ON position.  
the control is in the DOOR  
position and any door is open.  
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you  
open the doors.  
Interior lighting battery saver  
The interior lamps will automatically extinguish after 10 minutes when  
the ignition key is in OFF/LOCK position, a door has been left open or  
the interior lamp controls are in the ON position.  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
Headlamp Condensation  
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters  
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that  
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear  
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.  
Using the right bulbs  
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs  
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure  
lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility.  
Note: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the  
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.  
Function  
Number of bulbs  
Trade number  
Headlamps (high and  
low beams)  
2
H13  
Park/turn lamps  
(front)  
Rear  
2
2
3457 NAK (amber)  
4157K  
stop/tail/sidemarker  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Function  
Number of bulbs  
Trade number  
Backup lamp  
Foglamp (front)  
Center High-mount  
stop lamp  
Rear license plate  
lamp  
2
2
5
921  
9145  
W5WL  
168  
2
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.  
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer  
Replacing the interior bulbs  
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.  
Replacing exterior bulbs  
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.  
Replacing headlamp bulbs  
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.  
2. Open the hood.  
3. Reach over the front bolster.  
4. Remove the bulb by turning it  
counterclockwise and then  
pulling it straight out.  
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb  
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If  
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be  
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is  
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to  
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of  
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection  
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
5. Disconnect the electrical  
connector from the bulb.  
WARNING: Children and  
Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a  
halogen bulb is dangerous.  
Serious injuries could be  
caused by dropping a halogen  
bulb or breaking in some other  
way. Always keep halogen bulbs  
out of the reach of children.  
6. Connect the electrical connector on the new bulb.  
7. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.  
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb  
clockwise to install.  
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs  
For bulb replacement, see your authorized Mazda dealer.  
Replacing tail/stop/turn/backup lamp bulbs  
The tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same  
portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the  
same steps to replace either bulb:  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch  
is in the OFF position and then  
open the liftgate to expose the  
lamp assembly screws.  
2. Remove the two screws from  
the lamp assembly.  
3. Carefully remove the lamp  
assembly away from the vehicle  
by pulling the assembly straight  
out to expose the bulb socket.  
DO NOT TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.  
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp  
assembly.  
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.  
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure  
with two screws.  
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch  
is in the OFF position.  
2. Depress the lever and carefully  
pry the license plate lamp  
assembly (located above the  
license plate) from the liftgate.  
3. Rotate the bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove  
from lamp assembly.  
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket  
and push in the new bulb.  
5. Install the bulb socket into the  
lamp assembly and rotate  
clockwise.  
6. To install, carefully press the  
lamp assembly into liftgate.  
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs  
To remove the lamp assembly:  
1. Remove the two screws and  
move the lamp assembly away  
from the liftgate.  
2. Remove the bulb holder from  
the lamp assembly by  
depressing the snaps.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the  
socket and push in the new  
bulb.  
To complete installation, follow the  
removal procedure in reverse order.  
Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)  
1. Make sure the foglamp switch is  
in the OFF position.  
2. From underneath the vehicle,  
rotate the harness/bulb  
assembly counterclockwise, to  
remove from the fog lamp.  
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb  
from the harness assembly via  
the two snap clips.  
Install the new bulb in reverse order.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER  
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end  
of the control away from you to  
increase the speed of the wipers;  
rotate towards you to decrease the  
speed of the wipers.  
Windshield washer: Push the end  
of the stalk:  
briefly: causes a single swipe of  
the wipers without washer fluid.  
a quick push and hold: the wipers  
will swipe three times with  
washer fluid.  
a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for  
up to ten seconds.  
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds  
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down  
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.  
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.  
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid  
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.  
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper  
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,  
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper  
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.  
Windshield wiper features (if equipped with Autolamp feature)  
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, headlamp control in  
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on (for a  
fixed period of time).  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Rear window wiper/washer controls  
For rear wiper operation, rotate the  
rear window wiper and washer  
control to the desired position.  
Select:  
INT 2 — Normal speed operation of  
rear wiper.  
INT 1 — Intermittent operation of  
rear wiper.  
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.  
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer  
control to either position.  
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2  
or OFF position.  
MANUAL TILT STEERING COLUMN  
To adjust the steering wheel:  
1. Pull down the steering column  
tilt lever.  
2. Move the steering wheel up or  
down until you find the desired  
location.  
3. Push the steering column tilt  
lever up. This will lock the  
steering wheel in position.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver  
to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of  
control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving.  
CENTER CONSOLE  
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of console features. These  
include:  
1. Cupholders  
2. Utility compartment console lid  
has a CD holder, a business card  
holder and two pen holders.  
The utility compartment has a  
removable bin with coin holder  
slots, a sliding tray, a cell phone  
holder and CD holders  
3. Rear power point  
4. Rear cupholders  
5. Small storage trays  
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholders. Hard objects  
can injure you in a collision.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
The tray and inside bin can be  
removed to open up space to fit a  
laptop computer, MP3 players, CDs  
or handbags. To remove, open the  
console lid and pull the bin straight  
up and out from the console  
housing.  
The sliding tray and inside bin can  
be hooked on the side or rear of the  
console for extra storage.  
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12V)  
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert  
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the  
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power  
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
The auxiliary power point is located  
in the instrument panel.  
A second auxiliary power point is  
located on the rear side of the  
center console.  
Do not use the power point for  
operating the cigarette lighter  
element (if equipped).  
To prevent the fuse from being  
blown, do not use the power  
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or  
cigar lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to  
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information  
on checking and replacing fuses.  
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power  
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.  
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.  
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)  
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter  
socket.  
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will  
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from  
its heating position when it is ready to be used.  
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your  
warranty.  
Power point (110 VAC) (if equipped)  
The 110 VAC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices  
that require up to 150W. Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power  
point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Note: The 110 VAC power point is  
equipped with a safety cap and a  
safety twist tab. They both provide  
protection from inserting any object  
into the power point other than the  
110 VAC electrical device plug. The  
safety cap should always be in a  
closed position whenever the power  
point outlet is not in use.  
The 110 VAC power point is located  
in the floor console in front of the  
gearshift.  
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances;  
they may not work properly:  
Cathode ray tube type televisions.  
Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric  
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.  
Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical  
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.  
Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:  
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.  
Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point  
whenever the device is not in use. It is not recommended to use  
any extension cord with the 110 VAC power point, since it will  
defeat the safety protection design provided by the cap and twist  
tab. It will also cause the power point to overload due to  
powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150W load  
limit.  
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,  
overheated, or shorted. For overloading and shorting conditions, unplug  
your device and turn the ignition key off then on. For an overheating  
condition, let the system cool off, then turn the ignition key off then on.  
The 110 VAC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle  
ignition is in the run position and the power point green indicator light  
located in the top left corner is turned on. Refer to the indicator light  
code below for the power point status.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Indicator light Code  
Green light is On — Power point is ready to supply power  
Green light is Off — Power point power supply is off. Ignition is not in  
RUN position  
Green light is blinking — Power point is in fault mode  
POWER WINDOWS  
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and  
do not let children play with the power windows. They may  
seriously injure themselves.  
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify  
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or  
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.  
Press and pull the window switches  
to open and close windows.  
Push down (to the first detent)  
AUTO  
and hold the switch to open.  
Pull up (to the first detent) and  
hold the switch to close.  
One touch down (AUTO)  
Allows the driver’s window to open  
fully without holding the control  
down. Push the switch completely  
down to the second detent and  
release quickly. The window will  
open fully. Momentarily press the  
switch to any position to stop the  
window operation.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Window lock  
The window lock feature allows only  
the driver to operate the power  
windows.  
To lock out all the window controls  
(except for the driver’s) press the  
right side of the control. Press the  
left side to restore the window  
controls.  
Accessory delay  
With accessory delay, the window switches, moon roof (if equipped) and  
audio system may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch  
is turned to the OFF position or until either front door is opened.  
INTERIOR MIRROR  
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm  
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.  
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Automatic dimming rear view mirror (if equipped)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with  
an inside rear view mirror which has  
an auto-dimming function. The  
electronic day/night mirror will  
change from the normal (high  
reflective) state to the non-glare  
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the  
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically  
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.  
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the  
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) (when the mirror is on) to ensure a  
bright clear view when backing up.  
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the inside rear  
view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance.  
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh  
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Electronic compass (if equipped)  
The compass heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and  
NW in the center stack display.  
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large  
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic  
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect  
compass accuracy.  
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will  
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal  
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual  
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.  
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that  
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four  
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the  
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this  
error. Refer to Compass calibration adjustment.  
Compass zone adjustment  
1. Determine which magnetic zone  
you are in for your geographic  
location by referring to the zone  
3 2  
4
1
15  
map.  
14  
13  
2. Turn ignition to the ON  
position.  
5
12  
6
7 8 91011  
3. Locate the reset button on top  
of the compass sensor mounted  
behind the mirror.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
4. Press and hold the reset button  
on the compass module for  
approximately 5 seconds until  
ZONE XX appears in the center  
stack display.  
5. Continue to press the reset button until the correct zone appears in  
the center stack display.  
6. The direction will display after  
the button is released. The zone  
is now updated.  
Compass calibration adjustment  
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures  
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical  
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all  
vehicle doors are shut.  
1. Start the vehicle.  
2. Locate the reset button on the compass sensor mounted on the base  
of mirror.  
3. To calibrate, press and hold the  
reset button on the compass  
module for approximately ten  
seconds until CAL appears.  
Release the button.  
4. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until  
the CAL display changes to the direction value. It may take up to  
five circles to complete calibration.  
5. The compass is now calibrated.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
EXTERIOR MIRRORS  
Power side view mirrors  
To adjust your mirrors:  
1. Rotate the control clockwise to  
adjust the right mirror and  
rotate the control  
counterclockwise to adjust the  
left mirror.  
2. Move the control in the  
direction you wish to tilt the  
mirror.  
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.  
Fold-away mirrors  
Fold the side mirrors in carefully  
when driving through a narrow  
space, like an automatic car wash.  
Heated outside mirrors  
(if equipped)  
Both mirrors are heated  
automatically to remove ice, mist  
and fog when the rear window  
defrost is activated.  
Do not remove ice from the  
mirrors with a scraper or  
attempt to readjust the mirror  
glass if it is frozen in place.  
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
With cruise control/speed control set, you can maintain a set speed  
without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.  
WARNING: Using cruise control in the following conditions  
could cause you to lose control of the vehicle:  
Heavy or unsteady traffic  
Slippery or winding roads  
Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed  
Don’t use cruise control in these situations.  
Setting speed control  
The controls for using your speed  
control are located on the steering  
wheel for your convenience.  
1. Press the ON control and  
release it.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.  
3. Press the SET + control and  
release it.  
4. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal.  
5. The indicator light  
on the  
instrument cluster will turn on.  
Note:  
Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a  
steep hill.  
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you  
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below  
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.  
Disengaging speed control  
To disengage the speed control:  
Depress the brake pedal  
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.  
Resuming a set speed  
Press the RESUME control and  
release it. This will automatically  
return the vehicle to the previously  
set speed.  
Increasing speed while using speed control  
There are three ways to set a higher  
speed:  
Press and hold the SET + control  
until you get to the desired  
speed, then release the control.  
Press and release the SET +  
control to operate the Tap-Up  
function. Each tap will increase  
the set speed by 1 mph (1.6  
km/h).  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the  
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Reducing speed while using speed control  
There are three ways to reduce a  
set speed:  
Press and hold the SET - control  
until you get to the desired  
speed, then release the control.  
Press and release the SET - control  
to operate the Tap-Down function.  
Each tap will decrease the set  
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Depress the brake pedal until the  
desired vehicle speed is reached,  
press the SET + control.  
Turning off speed control  
There are two ways to turn off the  
speed control:  
Press the speed control OFF  
control.  
Turn OFF the ignition.  
Note: When you turn off the speed  
control or the ignition, your speed  
control set speed memory is erased.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of  
vehicle control, accident and injury. Mazda strongly  
recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any  
device that may take their focus off the road. The drivers  
primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle.  
Only use steering wheel controls and other devices not  
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.  
These controls allow you to operate some audio control features.  
Radio control features  
Press MEDIA to select:  
AM, FM1, FM2, or CD  
LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack) (if  
equipped)  
In Radio mode:  
Press  
to access the  
next/previous preset station.  
In CD mode:  
Press  
to listen to the  
next track on the disc.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
In any mode:  
Press VOL + or - to adjust the  
volume.  
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or  
leave children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously  
hurt themselves.  
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that  
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets  
are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.  
To operate the moon roof:  
The moon roof is equipped with  
an automatic, one-touch, express  
opening feature. Press and  
release the rear portion of the  
control. To stop motion at any  
time during the one-touch  
opening, press the control again.  
To close, press and hold the front  
portion of the control until the moon roof comes to a complete stop  
then release the control.  
To operate the moon roof vent position:  
To open, press and hold the front portion of the control. This will  
open the vent.  
To close, press and hold the rear portion of the control until the moon  
roof comes to a complete stop then release the control.  
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is  
installed, the moon roof needs to be opened to the vent position to reset  
the moon roof positions.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
If you open and close the moon roof repeatedly, the moon roof motor  
may overheat and shut down for 45 seconds while the motor cools.  
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)  
With the ignition in the RUN  
position, the message center,  
located on your instrument cluster,  
displays important vehicle  
information through a constant  
monitor of vehicle systems. You  
may select display features on the message center for a display of status.  
The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a  
display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.  
Selectable features  
Reset  
Press this control to select and reset  
functions shown in the INFO menu  
and SETUP menu.  
Info menu  
This control displays the following  
control displays:  
Trip Odometer A or B  
Distance to Empty  
Average Fuel Economy (if  
equipped)  
Instantaneous Fuel Economy (if equipped)  
Electric Energy  
Blank (odometer off)  
Note: If equipped with a Navigation Screen, the Average Fuel Economy  
and Instantaneous Fuel Economy will display in that screen instead of  
the message center display.  
Odometer/Trip odometer  
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Distance to empty (DTE)  
Selecting this function from the  
INFO menu will give you an  
estimate of how far you can drive  
with the fuel remaining in your tank  
under normal driving conditions.  
Remember to turn the ignition OFF  
when refueling your vehicle. Otherwise, the display will not show the  
addition of fuel for a few miles (kilometers). DTE will vary according to  
your driving habits.  
Average fuel economy (AFE) (if equipped)  
Selecting this function from the  
INFO menu will display your  
average fuel economy in miles/gallon  
or liters/100 km.  
If you calculate your average fuel  
economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel  
by used 100 kilometers traveled), your figure may be different than  
displayed for the following reasons:  
your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up  
differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at  
service stations  
variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another  
rounding off the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)  
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control  
system engaged to display a stabilized average.  
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.  
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed  
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.  
To reset back to zero, press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds.  
Instantaneous fuel economy (if equipped)  
Select this function from the INFO  
menu to display your instantaneous  
fuel economy. This will display your  
fuel economy as a Bar Graph  
ranging from  
poor economy  
to  
excellent economy.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.  
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows  
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.  
, one or no bars  
Electric Energy  
Select this function from the INFO  
menu for the state of charge of the  
high voltage battery. For normal  
operation “ELECT ENERGY OK”  
will be displayed.  
Setup menu  
Press this control for the following  
displays:  
Reset to English (if in another  
language)  
System Check  
Oil Life  
Units (English/Metric)  
Autolamp Delay (if equipped)  
Autolock (if equipped)  
Autounlock (if equipped)  
Language  
Reset to English (if in another language)  
When entering the SETUP MENU  
and a non-English language has  
been selected, “PRESS RESET FOR  
ENGLISH” will be displayed to  
change back to English.  
Press the RESET control to change back to English.  
System check  
Selecting this function from the  
SETUP menu causes the message  
center to cycle through each of the  
systems being monitored. For each  
of the monitored systems, the  
message center will indicate either  
an OK message or a warning message for four seconds.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of  
the systems being monitored. If you don’t press any button, the system  
will cycle itself.  
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:  
1. Oil life  
2. Electric drive  
3. Brake system  
4. Liftgate and glass  
5. DTE/Fuel level  
Oil life  
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.  
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.  
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change  
(approximately 10,000 miles [16,000 km] or 12 months) perform the  
following:  
1. Press and release the SETUP  
control to display “OIL LIFE =  
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW”.  
2. Press and hold the RESET  
control for 2 seconds and  
release. Oil life is set to 100%  
and “OIL LIFE SET TO 100%”  
is displayed.  
3. While “OIL LIFE SET TO 100%”  
is displayed, if a lower oil life start value is desired, press and release  
the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the  
RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent.  
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 10,000 miles [16,000 km] or 12  
months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life  
start value to 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and 219 days.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Units (English/Metric)  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu for the current  
units to be displayed.  
2. Press the RESET control to  
change the message display  
from English to Metric.  
Autolamp delay  
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the  
ignition is switched off.  
1. To disable/enable the autolamp  
delay feature, select this  
function from the SETUP  
control for the current display  
mode.  
2. Press the RESET control to  
select the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or  
180 seconds.  
Autolock  
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is  
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.  
1. To disable/enable the autolock  
feature, select this function  
from the SETUP control for the  
current display mode.  
2. Press the RESET control to  
turn the autolock ON or OFF.  
Autounlock  
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s  
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.  
1. To disable/enable the  
autounlock feature, select this  
function from the SETUP  
control for the current display  
mode.  
2. Press the RESET control switch  
to turn the autounlock ON or OFF.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Language  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu for the current  
language to be displayed.  
2. Waiting 4 seconds or pressing  
the RESET control cycles the  
message center through each of the language choices.  
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.  
3. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds to set the language  
choice.  
System warnings/information  
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your  
vehicle’s operating systems.  
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will  
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four  
seconds.  
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no  
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of  
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the  
RESET control and clearing the warning message.  
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:  
They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.  
They will not reappear until an ignition LOCK-RUN cycle has been  
completed if the fault condition still exists.  
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within  
the vehicle.  
Warnings  
Driver door ajar  
Status  
Warning cannot be reset  
Passenger door ajar  
Rear left door ajar  
Rear right door ajar  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Warnings  
Stop safely now  
Status  
Warning returns after 10 minutes if  
condition still exists  
High engine temperature  
High motor temperature  
Park brake engaged  
XXX miles (km) to empty fuel  
level low  
Liftgate/Glass ajar  
Service brake system  
Low brake fluid  
Warning returns after the ignition key  
is turned from OFF to RUN.  
Regen brakes disabled  
Low tire pressure  
Tire pressure monitor fault  
Tire pressure sensor fault  
XX% oil life change soon  
Oil change required  
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver door is not  
completely closed.  
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger door is not  
completely closed.  
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not  
completely closed.  
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not  
completely closed.  
STOP SAFELY NOW. Displayed when the Master electrical hazard  
warning lamp is illuminated indicating a Hybrid component failure. If this  
warning occurs, the vehicle will soon shutdown without further warning,  
stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your authorized  
dealer as soon as possible.  
HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine coolant  
is overheating. Engine coolant temperature warning lamp will illuminate  
indicating coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely  
possible, turn off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and  
coolant level. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,  
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding  
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot.  
HIGH MOTOR TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the motor  
electronics are overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible,  
turn off the engine and let it cool. Refer to Engine coolant and  
motor/electronics coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED. Displayed when the manual park brake is  
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph  
(5 km). If the warning stays on after the park brake is released, contact  
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
XXX MILES TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW. Displayed as an early  
reminder of a low fuel condition.  
LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate or liftgate glass  
is not completely closed. Press RESET to reset display.  
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the braking system is not  
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,  
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
LOW BRAKE FLUID. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the  
brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid  
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
REGEN BRAKES DISABLED. Indicates the regenerative braking  
system is disabled at this moment. Please see your authorized dealer if  
this warning remains present over several days.  
LOW TIRE PRESSURE. Displayed when one or more tires on your  
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the  
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or  
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized  
dealer.  
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure  
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more  
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,  
Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to  
come on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer  
XX% OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON/OIL CHANGE REQUIRED.  
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. When oil life  
left is between 10% and 0%, the XX% OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON  
message will be displayed. When oil life left reaches 0%, the OIL  
CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed.  
LIFTGATE  
To open the liftgate window,  
unlock the liftgate (with the  
power door locks or the remote  
entry) and push the right side  
control button under the license  
plate lamp shield.  
To open the liftgate, unlock the  
liftgate (with the power door  
locks or the remote entry) and  
push the middle control button  
under the license plate lamp  
shield.  
To lock the liftgate and the liftgate window, use the power door locks.  
Do not open the liftgate or liftgate glass in a garage or other enclosed  
area with a low ceiling. If the liftgate glass is raised and the liftgate is  
also opened, both liftgate and glass could be damaged against a low  
ceiling.  
Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so  
could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as  
allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.  
WARNING: Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are  
closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the  
vehicle. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide which can  
injure your lungs and cause drowsiness and even death. This  
will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you  
must drive with the liftgate door or window open, keep the  
vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
CARGO AREA FEATURES  
Cargo shade (if equipped)  
If your vehicle has a cargo shade, you can use it to cover items in the  
cargo area of your vehicle.  
To install the shade:  
Insert the ends of the cargo  
shade into the mounting features  
located behind the rear seat on  
the rear trim panels.  
To operate the shade:  
1. Grasp the rear edge of the cargo  
shade and pull rearward.  
2. Secure both ends of the support  
rod into the retention slots  
located on the rear quarter trim panels.  
WARNING: Ensure that the posts are properly latched in  
mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop  
or accident if it is not securely installed.  
WARNING: Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade.  
They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of vehicle in  
the case of a sudden stop or collision.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
LUGGAGE RACK  
Your vehicle is equipped with a roof  
rack. The maximum load for the  
roof rack is 100 lbs (44 kg), evenly  
distributed on the cross-bars. If it is  
not possible to evenly distribute the  
load, position it in the center or as  
far forward on the cross-bars as  
possible.  
Do not use the vehicle’s door  
handles as tie down loops. Use  
the tie-down loops on the  
thumbwheels to secure load.  
To adjust the cross-bar (if equipped) position:  
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both  
ends of the cross-bar (both  
cross-bars are adjustable).  
2. Slide the cross-bar to the  
desired location.  
3. Tighten the thumbwheel at both  
ends of the cross-bar.  
To remove the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) from the roof rack  
side rails:  
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both  
ends of the cross-bar (both  
cross-bars are adjustable).  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
2. Slide the cross-bar to the end of  
the rail.  
3. Use a long, flat object to  
depress the tongue in the  
endcaps on both sides of the  
cross-bar.  
4. Slide the cross-bar assembly off  
the end of the rail.  
To reinstall the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) to the roof rack  
side rails:  
1. Ensure that both cross-bar  
assemblies are installed with the  
F (front) arrow facing towards  
the front of the vehicle.  
2. Use a long, flat object to depress  
the tongue in the endcaps on  
both sides of the cross-bar.  
3. Slide the cross-bar assemblies  
over the end cap tongue and  
into the side rails.  
4. Tighten thumbwheel at both  
ends of the cross-bar.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
KEYS  
Your vehicle is equipped with two  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters  
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a  
programmed ignition key that  
operates all the locks and starts the  
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry  
transmitter.  
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key  
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer  
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized  
dealer. Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter  
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if  
desired.  
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.  
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to  
the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.  
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were  
issued with an adhesive security  
label on them that provides  
important vehicle key cut  
information. It is recommended that  
you maintain the label in a safe  
place for future reference, such as  
the inside front cover of this  
Owner’s Manual.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
POWER DOOR LOCKS  
Press the  
control to unlock all  
doors.  
Press the  
control to lock all  
doors.  
Door key unlocking/locking  
Unlocking the doors  
Turn the key in the door cylinder to unlock the driver’s door only. All  
other doors will remain locked.  
Locking the doors  
Turn the key in the door cylinder to lock the driver’s door only.  
Smart unlocking feature  
The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out  
of the vehicle. With the key in any ignition position, the driver’s door will  
automatically unlock if it is locked using the power lock control on the  
driver’s door panel while the driver’s door is open.  
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS  
When these locks are set, the rear  
doors cannot be opened from the  
inside. The rear doors can be  
opened from the outside when the  
doors are unlocked.  
The childproof locks are located on  
rear edge of each rear door and  
must be set separately for each  
door.  
NOTE: Setting the lock for one  
door will not automatically set the  
lock for both doors so you must set  
each child lock on each door  
separately.  
Insert the key and turn in the direction of arrow shown on the door to  
engage the child proof lock. Turn in the opposite direction to disengage  
childproof locks.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the  
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
The typical operating range for your  
IKT is approximately 33 feet (10  
meters). A decrease in operating  
range could be caused by:  
weather conditions,  
nearby radio towers,  
structures around the vehicle, or  
other vehicles parked next to  
your vehicle.  
The IKT allows you to:  
remotely unlock the vehicle  
doors.  
remotely lock all the vehicle  
doors.  
remotely open the power liftgate glass.  
activate the personal alarm.  
operate the illuminated entry feature.  
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position  
except while the key is held in the 4 (START) position. The panic  
feature operates with the key in the 1 (LOCK) position.  
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take  
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized  
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.  
Two step door unlocking  
1. Press  
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior  
lamps will illuminate if the lamp is in the DOOR position.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
2. Press  
and release again within three seconds to unlock the  
passenger doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass.  
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after  
the ignition is turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.  
One step door unlocking  
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press  
and release  
once to unlock all of the doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass. Note: The  
interior lamps will illuminate (refer to Illuminated entry information  
later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is in the DOOR  
position.  
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking  
Unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door  
unlocking by pressing and holding both  
and  
buttons  
simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately 4  
seconds. The turn signal will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has  
switched to one step unlocking. Repeat the procedure to switch back to  
two step unlocking.  
Locking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to lock all the doors. Assuming all vehicle  
doors and the liftgate are properly closed and the park/turn lamps  
will flash once.  
2. Press  
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all  
the doors and liftgate are closed and locked. Note: The doors will  
lock again and the horn will chirp once.  
If any of the doors or the hood are not properly closed, the horn will  
chirp twice and park/turn lamps will not flash when the  
pressed.  
control is  
Opening the liftgate (if equipped)  
Press  
twice within 3 seconds to open the liftgate glass.  
Car finder  
Press  
twice within 3 seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn lamps  
will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate your  
vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Sounding a panic alarm  
Press and hold  
for 1.5 seconds to activate the alarm. To deactivate  
the feature, press the control again, turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4  
(START) position, or wait for the alarm to time out in approximately 3  
minutes.  
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1  
(LOCK) position.  
Replacing the battery  
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt  
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of  
the IKT near the key ring in  
order to remove the battery  
cover.  
2. Do not wipe off any grease on  
the battery terminals on the  
back surface of the circuit  
board.  
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when  
disposing of transmitter batteries.  
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for  
the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to  
ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.  
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.  
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become  
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after  
battery replacement.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)  
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters  
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional  
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your  
authorized dealer for reprogramming.  
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)  
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to  
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft  
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform  
this procedure yourself.  
Illuminated entry  
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is  
used to unlock the door(s).  
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:  
the ignition is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or  
the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or  
the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
The inside lights will not turn off if:  
they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or  
any door is open.  
Illuminated exit  
The interior lights will illuminate when the key is removed from the  
ignition.  
The lamps automatically turn off after 25 seconds. The dome and cargo  
lamp controls must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated  
exit system to operate.  
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry  
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will  
illuminate when the  
(unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:  
Head lamps  
Park lamps  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Tail lamps  
The lamps will automatically turn off:  
if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (RUN) position, or  
the IKT  
(lock) control is pressed, or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature  
will not activate in daylight conditions.  
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry  
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by  
your authorized dealer.  
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to  
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure  
the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all vehicle doors are closed.  
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will  
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a  
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.  
1. The ignition must be OFF to  
begin the sequence.  
2. Place the key in the ignition and  
turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)  
position.  
3. Press the power door unlock  
control on the door panel three  
times.  
4. Turn the ignition from the 3  
(RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK)  
position.  
5. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.  
6. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp  
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is  
active.  
7. Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds. Note:  
The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature  
has been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one  
short and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has  
been activated.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
8. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position to exit the procedure.  
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is  
complete.  
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM  
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization  
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being  
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)  
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of  
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.  
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;  
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.  
Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter  
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if  
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your  
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming  
spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for instructions on how to  
program the coded key.  
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with  
non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may  
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.  
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to  
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same  
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these  
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These  
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a  
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the  
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on  
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.  
Anti-theft indicator  
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.  
When the ignition is in the 1  
(LOCK) position, the indicator  
will flash once every 2 seconds to  
indicate the SecuriLock™ system  
is functioning as a theft deterrent.  
When the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, the indicator will glow  
for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flash  
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position. If  
this occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an  
authorized dealer for service.  
Automatic arming  
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1  
(LOCK) position.  
The theft indicator will flash every  
two seconds to act as a theft  
deterrent when the vehicle is  
armed.  
Automatic disarming  
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the 3  
(RUN) position.  
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If  
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes  
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.  
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys  
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead  
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition  
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote  
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be  
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs  
with remote entry functionality.  
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock™ coded keys are lost or stolen and  
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle  
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from  
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.  
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key  
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any  
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional  
spare or replacement keys.  
Programming spare keys  
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard  
SecuriLock™ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program  
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded  
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be  
IKTs with remote entry functionality.  
Tips:  
Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard  
SecuriLock™ keys.  
You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that  
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed  
key(s) readily accessible.  
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must  
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)  
programmed.  
Please read and understand the  
entire procedure before you begin.  
1. Insert the first previously  
programmed coded key into  
the ignition.  
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN)  
position. Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three  
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.  
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the first  
coded key from the ignition.  
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,  
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.  
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN)  
position. Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three  
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.  
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second  
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.  
7. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)  
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert  
the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN)  
position. Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least six  
seconds.  
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.  
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s  
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate  
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.  
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your  
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The  
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may  
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your  
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.  
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds  
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
FRONT SEATS  
Notes:  
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to  
slide under the seat’s seat belt, resulting in severe personal  
injuries in the event of a collision.  
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to  
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.  
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original  
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped  
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original  
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully  
latched. An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event  
of a sudden stop or collision.  
Adjustable head restraints  
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the  
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the  
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close  
to that position as possible.  
The head restraints can be moved  
up and down.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Push side control and push down on  
head restraint to lower it.  
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)  
Lift handle to move seat forward or  
backward.  
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicle is moving. You could move out of position to control the  
vehicle. Then a serious accident could occur. Sudden braking or  
a collision could cause serious injury. Adjust the seat only when  
the vehicle is stopped.  
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to  
reduce the risk of injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips and the shoulder  
belt snug across the chest.  
WARNING: Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous because you don’t get the full protection  
from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can  
slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injury, or in  
a rear end collision you could fly up and out of the vehicle. For  
maximum protection, sit well back and upright.  
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat  
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion  
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system,  
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit  
upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do  
not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback  
map pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger  
seat. Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat  
or between the seat and the center console (if equipped).  
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator  
lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front passenger  
sensing system section for additional details. Failure to follow  
these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat  
sensing system.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.  
Move the front of the control up or  
down to raise or lower the front  
portion of the seat cushion.  
Move the rear of the control up or  
down to raise or lower the rear  
portion of the seat cushion.  
Move the control in the directions  
shown to move the seat forward,  
backward, up or down.  
Heated seats (if equipped)  
To operate the heated seats:  
Push the button located on the  
instrument panel to activate.  
Push again to deactivate.  
The heated seats will activate when the ignition is in the RUN position.  
The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
REAR SEATS  
Head restraints  
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the  
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the  
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close  
to that position as possible.  
The head restraints can be moved  
up and down. Lift the head restraint  
so that it is located directly or as  
close as possible behind your head.  
Push control to lower or remove  
head restraint.  
Folding down rear seats  
1. Raise the rear seat head  
restraint and remove.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Place the head restraint under  
the front seat for storage.  
3. Pull the seat release control.  
Note: Make sure the floor is clear of all objects before folding the seat.  
4. Flip seat forward.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Attach the seat belt web snap  
button to the quarter trim panel  
snap button. This will ensure that  
seat belt does not get caught by  
staying out of the seat back folding  
path.  
5. To release seatback, pull the  
seatback release lever (on top  
of seat) toward the front seat.  
This is common for both 60%  
and 40% seatbacks.  
Note: When the seatback release  
lever is pulled, slowly lower  
seatback to the flat position.  
6. Rotate seatback down into load  
floor position.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Returning the rear seats to upright position  
1. Pull seatback up and into  
upright position making sure  
seatback locks into place and  
the red seat unlatched indicator  
on release paddle is not visible.  
2. Rotate seat cushion down into  
the seating position making sure  
that the seat cushion is locked  
into place and that the seat belt  
buckles are exposed.  
WARNING: Make sure seat  
belt buckle heads are through  
elastic holders on seat backs.  
Seat belt buckles may break if  
they are trapped underneath  
the seatback as the seatback is  
rotated down.  
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original  
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped  
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original  
position, reinstall the head restraints, and pull on the seatback  
to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may  
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Remove the head  
restraint stored under the  
front set and return it to the  
original position on the  
seatback. Failure to do so  
could result in personal injury.  
3. Unsnap the seat belt webbing from the quarter trim panel.  
To remove the rear cushion  
1. Lift the yellow tab to release the  
hinges.  
2. Pull the cushion to the outboard  
side of the vehicle.  
To install the rear cushion  
1. Push the cushion to the inboard  
side of the vehicle.  
2. Make sure that the hinges are  
locked into place.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS  
Personal Safety System™  
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of  
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help  
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating  
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of  
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.  
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:  
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
Front seat belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,  
and seat belt usage sensors  
Front passenger sensing system  
“Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp  
Front crash severity sensor  
Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors  
Driver’s seat position sensor  
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone  
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), seat belt  
pretensioners, front seat belt usage sensors, driver seat position  
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights  
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?  
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your  
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant  
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides  
information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the  
RCM activates the seat belt pretensioners and/or both stages of the  
dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and  
occupant conditions.  
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front  
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with  
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined  
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not  
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed  
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,  
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient  
longitudinal deceleration.  
Dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
The dual-stage airbag offers the capability to tailor the level of airbag  
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more  
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for  
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints  
section in this chapter.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Front crash severity sensor  
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the  
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable  
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This  
allows your Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash  
severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual-stage airbag and  
seat belt pretensioners.  
Driver’s seat position sensor  
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Safety System to tailor the  
deployment level of the driver airbag based on seat position. The system  
is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver  
airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.  
Front passenger sensing system  
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this  
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close  
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants  
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting  
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the  
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and  
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to  
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are  
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much  
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the  
front.  
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active  
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front  
seat, move the seat all the way back.  
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under  
in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child  
restraints.  
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the  
passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small  
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are  
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to  
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly  
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger  
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when the  
passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag(s)  
after a collision.  
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator  
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal  
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the airbags section  
of this chapter.  
Front seat belt usage sensors  
The front seat belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and  
front outboard passenger seat belts are fastened. This information allows  
your Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and seat belt  
pretensioner activation depending upon seat belt usage. Refer to Seat  
belt section in this chapter.  
Front seat belt pretensioners  
The seat belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are  
designed to tighten the seat belts firmly against the occupant’s body  
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the  
vehicle is equipped with the Safety Canopy™ system. This helps increase  
the effectiveness of the seat belts. In frontal collisions, the seat belt  
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient  
severity, together with the front airbags.  
Front seat belt energy management retractors  
The front outboard seat belt energy management retractors, once  
initiated, allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and  
controlled manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum.  
This helps reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s  
chest by limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy  
management feature section in this chapter.  
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational  
The Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a  
back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the  
Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
Routine maintenance of the Safety System is not required.  
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits  
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
seat belt pretensioners, front seat belt buckle sensors, driver seat  
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the  
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.  
The warning light will either flash or stay lit.  
The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Safety  
System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced,  
the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.  
Safety restraints precautions  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips and the shoulder  
belt snug across the chest.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit  
where they can be properly restrained.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,  
should always properly wear their seat belts, even when an air  
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in  
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do  
not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your  
vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die or be seriously injured than a  
person wearing a seat belt.  
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific  
seat belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one  
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the  
shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the  
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the seat belt  
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a  
single belt for more than one person.  
WARNING: Placing a child, 12 years or younger, in the front  
seat is dangerous. The child could be hit by a deploying airbag  
and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is more  
likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side airbag (if  
equipped) in a moderate collision. Whenever possible, always  
secure a child, 12 years or younger, in the rear seat, with an  
appropriate child restraint system for the child’s age and size.  
Never use a rear-facing child restraint system in the front seat  
with an airbag that could deploy.  
Combination lap and shoulder belts  
1. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle  
closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from) until  
you hear a snap and feel it  
latch. Make sure the tongue is  
securely fastened in the buckle.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. To unfasten, push the release  
button and remove the tongue  
from the buckle.  
Energy Management Feature  
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management  
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce  
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.  
The front outboard seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is  
designed to extend the seat belt webbing in a controlled manner. This  
helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.  
All seat belts in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The  
passenger seat belts have two types of locking modes described below:  
Vehicle sensitive mode  
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length  
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle  
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner  
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph  
(8 km/h) or more, the combination seat belts will lock to help reduce  
forward movement of the driver and passengers.  
Automatic locking mode  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will  
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic  
locking mode is not available on the driver seat belt.  
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (other than a  
belt-positioning booster) is installed. Children 12 years old and under  
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer  
to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in  
this chapter.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How to use the automatic locking mode  
Buckle the combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
Grasp the shoulder portion and  
pull downward until the entire  
belt is pulled out.  
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking  
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the automatic locking  
mode.  
How to disengage the automatic locking mode  
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract  
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the  
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.  
WARNING: After a collision all seat belts should be checked  
for proper function. In addition, the automatic locking retractor  
function in all but the driver’s seat must be checked by an  
authorized dealer to confirm the child restraint system  
functions properly.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE  
REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking  
retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not  
operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer.  
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could  
increase the risk of injury in collisions. The pretensioners in  
the front seats deploy with a related airbag and will only  
operate once and must be replaced to provide appropriate  
restraint in any future accident.  
Seat belt height adjustment  
Your vehicle has seat belt height  
adjustments at the front outboard  
seating positions. Adjust the height  
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests  
across the middle of your shoulder.  
To adjust the shoulder belt height,  
squeeze and hold the buttons on the  
side and slide the height adjuster up  
or down. Release the buttons and  
pull down on the height adjuster to  
make sure it is locked in place.  
WARNING: Position the seat belt height adjusters so that the  
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust  
the seat belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat  
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Seat belt pretensioner  
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belt pretensioners at the driver and  
front passenger seating positions.  
The seat belt pretensioners activate during frontal collisions, and in side  
collisions and rollovers. A seat belt pretensioner is a device which  
tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts in such a way that  
they fit more snugly against the body.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: The driver and front passenger seat belt system  
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be  
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in  
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and  
Safety Canopy™, and seat belt pretensioners.  
WARNING: Failure to replace the seat belt assembly under the  
above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the  
event of a collision.  
Seat belt extension assembly  
If the seat belt is too short when fully extended, a 9 inch (23 cm) or  
12 inch (31 cm) seat belt extension assembly can be added (part  
numbers 611C22–A and 611C22–B respectively). Seat belt extension  
assemblies can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.  
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the seat belt.  
Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the  
label. Also, use the seat belt extension only if the seat belt is too short  
for you when fully extended.  
When you are not using the extensions store them in another location so  
that no one will accidentally use them.  
NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt  
across the torso.  
Seat belt maintenance  
Inspect the seat belt systems periodically to make sure they work  
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the seat belts to make sure there  
are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All seat belt assemblies,  
including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle  
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters  
(if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety  
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be  
inspected after a collision. Mazda Motor Corporation recommends that all  
seat belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced.  
However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that  
the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do  
not need to be replaced. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a  
collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or  
improper operation is noted.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the seat  
belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe  
personal injuries in the event of a collision.  
For proper care of soiled seat belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning  
chapter.  
Seat belt warning light and indicator chime  
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a  
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their seat belts.  
Conditions of operation  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s seat belt is not  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The seat belt warning light illuminates  
1 minute and the warning chime  
sounds 6 seconds.  
The driver’s seat belt is  
buckled while the indicator  
light is illuminated and the  
warning chime is sounding...  
The driver’s seat belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The seat belt warning light and  
warning chime turn off.  
The seat belt warning light and  
indicator chime remain off.  
Belt-Minder  
The Belt-Minderfeature is a supplemental warning to the seat belt  
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by  
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the seat belt warning  
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s  
seat belt is unbuckled.  
The Belt-Minderfeature uses information from the front passenger  
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and  
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the  
Belt-Minderfeature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,  
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined  
by the front passenger sensing system.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Both the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt usages are monitored and  
either may activate the Belt-Minderfeature. The warnings are the same  
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minderwarnings have  
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver  
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the  
Belt-Minderfeature.  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s and front  
passenger’s seat belts are  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position or less than 1-2  
minutes have elapsed since the  
ignition switch has been turned  
ON...  
The Belt-Minderfeature will not  
activate.  
The driver’s or front  
The Belt-Minderfeature is activated  
- the seat belt warning light  
illuminates and the warning chime  
sounds for 6 seconds every 30  
passenger’s seat belt is not  
buckled when the vehicle has  
reached at least 5 km/h  
(3 mph) and 1-2 minutes have seconds, repeating for approximately  
elapsed since the ignition  
switch has been turned to  
ON...  
5 minutes or until the seat belts are  
buckled.  
The driver’s or front  
The Belt-Minderfeature is activated  
passenger’s seat belt becomes - the seat belt warning light  
unbuckled for approximately 1 illuminates and the warning chime  
minute while the vehicle is  
traveling at least 5 km/h (3  
mph) and more than 1-2  
sounds for 6 seconds every 30  
seconds, repeating for approximately  
5 minutes or until the seat belts are  
minutes have elapsed since the buckled.  
ignition switch has been turned  
to ON...  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing seat belts  
(All statistics based on U.S. data):  
Reasons given... Consider...  
ЉCrashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day. The more we  
eventsЉ  
drive, the more we are exposed to ЉrareЉ events,  
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be  
seriously injured in a crash during our  
lifetime.  
ЉI’m not going farЉ 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.  
ЉBelts are  
uncomfortableЉ  
Your Mazda seat belts are designed to enhance  
comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try different  
positions for the seat belt upper anchorage and  
seatback which should be as upright as possible;  
this can improve comfort.  
ЉI was in a hurryЉ Prime time for an accident. Belt-Minder௡  
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up.  
ЉSeat belts don’t  
workЉ  
Seat belts, when used properly, reduce risk of  
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,  
and by 60% in light trucks.  
ЉTraffic is lightЉ  
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle  
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.  
ЉBelts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more  
clothesЉ  
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are  
unbelted.  
ЉThe people I’m  
with don’t wear  
beltsЉ  
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more  
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.  
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate  
behavior they see.  
ЉI have an airbagЉ Airbags offer greater protection when used with  
seat belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to  
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.  
ЉI’d rather be  
thrown clearЉ  
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40  
times more likely to DIE. Seat belts help  
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T ЉPICK OUR CRASHЉ.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled seat belt or insert a  
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minderchime. To  
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air  
bag system  
One time disable  
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles  
the seat belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minderis disabled for  
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minderfeature will enable during  
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for  
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time  
disable.  
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderfeature  
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderare  
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating  
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will  
terminate the process.  
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the  
deactivation/activation programming procedure.  
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderfeatures can be  
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:  
Before following the procedure, make sure that:  
The parking brake is set  
The gearshift is in P (Park)  
The ignition switch is in the OFF position  
The driver and front passenger seat belts are unbuckled  
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your  
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances  
of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend  
you leave the Belt-Mindersystem activated for yourself and  
others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do  
not deactivate/activate the Belt-Minderfeature while driving  
the vehicle.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT  
START THE ENGINE)  
2. Wait until the seat belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1  
minute)  
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the seat belt  
warning light turns off.  
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle  
then unbuckle the seat belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.  
(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the seat belt  
warning light turns off.)  
After Step 3, the seat belt warning light will be turned on for three  
seconds.  
4. Within approximately 7 seconds of the light turning off, buckle then  
unbuckle the seat belt.  
This will disable the Belt-Minderfeature for that seating position if it  
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will  
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.  
This will enable the Belt-Minderfeature for that seating position if it  
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will  
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the  
light off, then followed by the seat belt warning light flashing 4 times  
per second for 3 seconds again.  
After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is  
complete.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)  
4X4  
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions  
The supplemental restraint system  
is designed to work with the seat  
belt to help protect the driver and  
right front passenger from certain  
upper body injuries.  
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT  
inflate slowly or gently and the  
risk of injury from a deploying  
airbag is greatest close to the  
trim covering the airbag  
module.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,  
should always properly wear their seat belts, even when an air  
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under  
in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child  
restraint systems.  
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches  
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag  
module.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: The driver should always hold onto only the rim of  
the steering wheel. Never place your arm over the airbag  
module or anywhere inside the rim as a deploying airbag can  
result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.  
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:  
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the  
pedals comfortably.  
Recline the seat slightly (one or two notches) from the upright  
position.  
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module  
including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag  
inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the  
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
Airbag Supplemental Restraint Systems or its fuses. See your  
authorized Mazda dealership.  
WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle,  
including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks,  
and snow plows may affect the performance of the airbag  
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front  
end of the vehicle.  
WARNING: Additional equipment may affect the performance  
of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your  
authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional  
equipment.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and airbags  
Children must always be properly  
restrained. Accident statistics  
suggest that children are safer when  
properly restrained in the rear  
seating positions than in the front  
seating position. Failure to follow  
these instructions may increase the  
risk of injury in a collision.  
WARNING: Airbags can kill or  
injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing  
child seat in front of an active  
airbag. If you must use a  
forward-facing child seat in the  
front seat, move the seat all  
the way back.  
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?  
The airbag SRS is designed to  
activate when the vehicle sustains a  
longitudinal deceleration sufficient  
to cause the airbag sensors to close  
an electrical circuit that initiates  
airbag inflation. The fact that the  
airbags did not inflate in a collision  
does not mean that something is  
wrong with the system. Rather, it  
means the forces were not sufficient  
enough to cause activation. Front  
airbags are designed to inflate in  
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or  
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal  
deceleration.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The airbags inflate and deflate  
rapidly upon activation. After airbag  
deployment, it is normal to notice a  
smoke-like, powdery residue or  
smell the burnt propellant. This may  
consist of cornstarch, talcum  
powder or sodium compounds which  
may irritate the skin and eyes, but  
none of the residue is toxic.  
While the SRS is designed to help  
reduce serious injuries, contact with  
a deploying airbag may also cause  
abrasions, swelling or temporary  
hearing loss. Because airbags must  
inflate rapidly and with considerable  
force, there is the risk of death or  
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal  
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are  
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is  
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away  
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.  
The SRS consists of:  
driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and  
airbags)  
one or more impact and safing sensors  
a readiness light and tone  
a diagnostic module  
and the electrical wiring which connects the components  
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits  
and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the  
impact sensors, the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the  
airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors).  
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not  
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag  
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of  
injury in a collision.  
Front passenger sensing system  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory  
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208  
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal  
airbag under certain conditions.  
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of  
the front passenger’s seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to  
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the  
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or  
disabled (will not inflate).  
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the  
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:  
the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in  
the front seat,  
the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant  
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,  
the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing  
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s  
instructions,  
the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,  
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of  
time,  
For side airbag equipped vehicles, the front passenger sensing system  
will turn off the passenger seat side airbag if:  
the seat is empty and seat belt is unbuckled.  
a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat and the  
child or small person is unbuckled.  
The front passenger sensing system  
uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or  
Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will  
illuminate and stay lit to remind you  
that the front passenger frontal airbag is off. The indicator lamp is  
located in the center stack of the instrument panel just above the air  
vents.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when  
the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.  
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the  
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the  
indicator lamp will be unlit.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not  
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant  
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.  
When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)  
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate  
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is  
disabled.  
If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not  
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the  
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)  
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a  
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.  
When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger  
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.  
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the  
Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is  
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:  
Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the  
full upright position.  
Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,  
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.  
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for  
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person  
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.  
If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be  
advised to ride in the rear seat, and the system should be taken  
promptly to an authorized dealer for repair before that seat is  
occupied again.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pass Airbag Off  
Occupant  
Passenger Airbag  
Indicator Lamp  
Empty seat  
Unlit  
Lit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Small child in child  
safety seat or booster  
Small child with seat  
belt buckled or  
unbuckled  
Lit  
Disabled  
Adult  
Unlit  
Enabled  
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children  
12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat.  
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seat belts, it’s  
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated  
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the  
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting  
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For  
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,  
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of  
injury during a crash is greatly increased.  
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat  
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion  
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system,  
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.  
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the  
floor.  
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects  
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front  
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the  
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not  
be illuminated according to the table below.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pass Airbag Off  
Passenger Airbag  
Indicator Lamp  
Objects  
Small (i.e. 3 ring  
binder, small purse,  
bottled water)  
Medium (i.e. heavy  
briefcase, fully packed  
luggage)  
Empty seat, or small  
to medium object with  
seat belt buckled  
Unlit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Lit  
Lit  
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is  
incorrect, check for the following:  
Objects lodged underneath the seat  
Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if  
equipped)  
Objects hanging off the seat back  
Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)  
Objects placed on the occupant’s lap  
Cargo interference with the seat  
Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat  
Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat  
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated  
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing  
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or  
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:  
Do not stow heavy objects in seat back map pocket (if  
equipped) or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front  
passenger seat.  
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or  
between the seat and the center console (if equipped).  
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator  
lamp for proper airbag Status.  
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front  
passenger seat sensing system.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
In case there is a problem with the  
front passenger sensing system, the  
airbag readiness lamp in the  
instrument cluster will stay lit.  
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:  
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that  
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering  
with the seat.  
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take  
the following steps to remove the obstruction:  
Pull the vehicle over.  
Turn the vehicle off.  
Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged  
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.  
Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).  
Restart the vehicle.  
Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no  
longer illuminated  
If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not  
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.  
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle  
immediately to an authorized Mazda dealer. Ask the front seat occupant  
to sit in a rear seat until the air bag system if checked by the authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to  
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Mazda Customer  
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer  
Assistance chapter of this Owner’s Manual.  
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger  
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing  
system.  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the status of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section in  
the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is  
not required.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness light will either  
flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not  
illuminate immediately after  
ignition is turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not  
function properly in the event of a collision.  
Seat-mounted side airbag system (if equipped)  
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or  
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front  
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a  
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may  
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.  
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of  
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side  
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.  
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag  
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an  
airbag. See an authorized dealer.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear  
their seat belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How does the side airbag system work?  
The design and development of the  
side airbag system included  
recommended testing procedures  
that were developed by a group of  
automotive safety experts known as  
the Side Airbag Technical Working  
Group. These recommended testing  
procedures help reduce the risk of  
injuries related to the deployment of  
side airbags.  
The side airbag system consists of  
the following:  
An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)  
with a gas generator concealed  
behind the outboard bolster of  
the driver and front passenger  
seatbacks.  
A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.  
The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used  
for the front airbags.  
Two crash sensors located on the lower portion of the b-pillar (one on  
each side of the vehicle).  
Side airbags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of  
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.  
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the  
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by  
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system  
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will  
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door  
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided  
occupants in side impact collisions.  
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral  
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit  
that initiates airbag inflation.  
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that  
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were  
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or  
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral  
deceleration.  
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.  
WARNING: If the side airbag  
has deployed, the airbag will  
not function again. The side  
airbag system (including the  
seat) must be inspected and  
serviced by an authorized  
dealer. If the airbag is not  
replaced, the unrepaired area  
will increase the risk of injury  
in a collision.  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness  
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the  
side airbag is not required.  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either  
flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may  
not function properly in the event of a collision.  
Side-curtain airbag system (if equipped)  
You can determine if you have a vehicle with a side-curtain airbag system  
by looking near the top of the trim between the windows and see an  
“SRS” label on the main pillars between the windows.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Do not place  
objects or mount equipment on  
or near the headliner at the  
siderail that may come into  
contact with a deploying  
side-curtain airbags (if  
equipped). Failure to follow  
these instructions may  
increase the risk of personal  
injury in the event of a  
collision.  
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door or window glass.  
The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) could injure you as it  
deploys from the headliner.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
side-curtain airbags (if equipped), fuses, the A, B, or C pillar  
trim, or the headliner on a vehicle containing side-curtain  
airbags. See your authorized Mazda dealer.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver  
should always wear their seat belts even when an airbag SRS  
and side-curtain airbags (if equipped) are provided.  
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place  
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable side-curtain  
airbags (if equipped).  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How do the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) work?  
The design and development of the  
side air curtain system included  
recommended testing procedures  
that were developed by a group of  
automotive safety experts known as  
the Side Airbag Technical Working  
Group. These recommended testing  
procedures help reduce the risk of  
injuries related to the deployment of  
side airbags (including side air  
curtain systems).  
The side-curtain airbags (if  
equipped) consists of the following:  
An inflatable nylon curtain with a  
gas generator concealed behind  
the headliner and above the doors  
(one on each side of vehicle).  
A headliner designed to flex open  
above the side doors to allow side-curtain airbag deployment.  
The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used  
for the front airbags.  
Two crash sensors mounted at lower B-Pillar (one on each side).  
Two crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one  
on each side).  
Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).  
The side-curtain airbags (if equipped), in combination with seat belts,  
can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant  
side impact collision or rollover event.  
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in  
the rear seats. The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) will not interfere  
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat  
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the  
doors along the side window opening.  
The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) are designed to activate when the  
vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to  
initiate side-curtain airbag (if equipped) inflation or when a certain  
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The side-curtain airbags are mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal,  
behind the headliner, above the first and second row seats. In certain  
lateral collisions or rollover events, the side-curtain airbags will be  
activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. In certain rollover  
events, the side-curtain airbag (if equipped) on both sides of the vehicle  
will be inflated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The side-curtain  
airbags (if equipped) are designed to inflate between the side window  
area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side  
impact collisions and rollover events.  
The fact that the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) did not activate in a  
collision does not mean that there is a malfunction with the system.  
Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause  
activation. The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) are designed to inflate  
in certain side impact collisions or rollover events, not in rear impact,  
frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient  
lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood.  
WARNING: Several  
side-curtain airbag (if  
equipped) components get hot  
after inflation. Do not touch  
them after inflation.  
WARNING: If the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) have  
deployed, the side-curtain airbags will not function again unless  
replaced. The side-curtain airbags (including the A, B and C  
pillar trim) must be inspected and serviced by a authorized  
dealer in accordance with the vehicle workshop manual. If the  
side-curtain airbags are not replaced, the unrepaired area will  
increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Determining if the side-curtain airbags are operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness  
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the  
airbag is not required.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either  
flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned on.  
A series of five beep sounds will be heard. The tone pattern will  
repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately. Unless serviced, the  
system may not function properly in the event of a collision.  
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles  
(including pretensioners)  
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified  
personnel.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN  
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety  
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.  
Important child restraint precautions  
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.  
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old  
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you  
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states  
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight  
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific  
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When  
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your  
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly  
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or  
child restraint you might use.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and seat belts  
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children  
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety  
seat manufacturer) should always wear seat belts.  
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that  
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.  
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can  
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or  
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child  
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt  
fit.  
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets  
unattended in your vehicle.  
Child booster seats  
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh  
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder  
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for  
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious  
injury in a crash.  
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who  
have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda Motor Corporation recommends  
use of a belt-positioning booster.  
Booster seats position a child so that seat belts fit better. They lift the  
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees  
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit  
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the  
shoulder.  
When children should use booster seats  
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the  
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and  
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about  
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).  
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these  
questions:  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Can the child sit all the way back  
against the vehicle seat back with  
knees bent comfortably at the  
edge of the seat without  
slouching?  
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?  
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?  
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?  
Types of booster seats  
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:  
Those that are backless.  
If your backless booster seat has a  
removable shield, remove the  
shield and use the lap/shoulder  
belt. If a seating position has a  
low seat back and no head  
restraint, a backless booster seat  
may place your child’s head (top  
of ear level) above the top of the  
seat. In this case, move the  
backless booster to another  
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.  
Those with a high back.  
If, with a backless booster seat,  
you cannot find a seating position  
that adequately supports your  
child’s head, a high back booster  
seat would be a better choice.  
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with  
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a  
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up  
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the  
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings  
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably  
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.  
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh  
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this  
condition.  
The importance of shoulder belts  
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s  
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should  
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster  
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children  
to ride.  
WARNING: Move a child to a different seating location if the  
shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during  
use.  
WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the  
manufacturer of the booster seat.  
WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or  
behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the  
upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or  
death in a collision.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a  
child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of  
injury or death in a collision.  
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN  
Child and infant or child safety seats  
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the  
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the  
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the  
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or  
collision.  
When installing a child safety seat:  
Review and follow the information  
presented in the airbag  
supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) section in this chapter.  
Use the correct seat belt buckle  
for that seating position (the  
buckle closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from).  
Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle until you hear a  
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the  
buckle.  
Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety  
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,  
to prevent accidental unbuckling.  
Place seat back in upright position.  
Put the seat belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic  
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating  
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.  
LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to  
48 lb. (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for  
children up to 60 lb. (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper  
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb. (36 kg) using an upper torso  
harness and a belt-positioning booster.  
Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether  
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,  
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For  
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this  
chapter.  
WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s  
instructions included with the safety seat you put in your  
vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly,  
the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.  
WARNING: Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should  
never be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.  
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder  
belts  
The rear seat head restraints must be removed when using a child  
seat.  
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air  
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front  
seat, move the seat all the way back.  
1. Position the child safety seat in  
a seat with a combination lap  
and shoulder belt.  
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly  
restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt  
and then grasp the shoulder  
belt and lap belt together.  
3. While holding the shoulder and  
lap belt portions together, route  
the tongue through the child  
seat according to the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions. Be  
sure the belt webbing is not  
twisted.  
4. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle  
closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from) for that  
seating position until you hear a  
snap and feel the latch engage.  
Make sure the tongue is latched  
securely by pulling on it.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
5. To put the retractor in the  
automatic locking mode, grasp  
the shoulder portion of the belt  
and pull downward until all of  
the belt is extracted and a click  
is heard.  
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate  
it is in the automatic locking mode.  
7. Pull the lap belt portion across  
the child seat toward the buckle  
and pull up on the shoulder belt  
while pushing down with your  
knee on the child seat.  
8. Allow the seat belt to retract to  
remove any slack in the belt.  
9. Before placing the child in the  
seat, forcibly tilt the seat  
forward and back to make sure  
the seat is securely held in  
place. To check this, grab the  
seat at the belt path and  
attempt to move it side to side  
and forward and back. There  
should be no more than one  
inch of movement for proper installation.  
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is  
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more  
belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat  
Steps 2 through 9.  
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps  
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which  
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether  
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact  
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a  
tether strap.  
The rear seating positions of your vehicle are equipped with built-in  
tether strap anchors located behind the seats on the roof panel in the  
cargo area.  
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions:  
WARNING: Attach the tether  
strap only to the appropriate  
tether anchor as shown. The  
tether strap may not work  
properly if attached  
somewhere other than the  
correct tether anchor.  
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.  
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.  
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, remove the head restraint  
first, place under the front seat for storage, and then route the tether  
strap over the top of the seatback.  
3. Locate the correct anchor for  
the selected seating position.  
There are three tether anchors  
located on the headliner at the rear  
of the vehicle.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
4. Clip the tether strap to the  
anchor as shown.  
The arrow in the above graphic  
points toward the front of the  
vehicle.  
WARNING: If the tether strap  
is clipped incorrectly, the child  
safety seat may not be  
retained properly in the event  
of a collision.  
5. Install the child safety seat  
tightly using the LATCH anchors or seat belts. Follow the  
instructions in this chapter.  
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk  
of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.  
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children) attachments for child seat anchors  
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments  
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.  
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the  
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be  
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with  
tether straps in this chapter.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the  
following locations:  
The anchors on both sides of the  
center of the rear seat are provided  
primarily for child seats at the  
outboard seats, and are further  
apart than the pairs of lower  
anchors for child seat installation at  
other seats. A child seat with rigid  
LATCH attachments cannot be  
installed at the center rear seat. A  
child seat with LATCH attachments on belt webbing can be used at the  
center rear seat unless a child seat at an outboard rear seat is attached  
to one of these lower anchors. Install a child seat onto the lower anchors  
at the center rear seat ONLY IF the child restraint manufacturer  
recommends that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are  
spaced up to 20 in (500 mm) apart.  
WARNING: Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the  
same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough  
to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break,  
causing serious injury or death.  
The lower anchors for child seat  
installation are located at the rear  
section of the second row seat  
between the cushion and seat back.  
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a  
child seat with LATCH attachments.  
WARNING: Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat  
only to the anchors shown.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten  
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion  
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without  
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the  
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.  
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly  
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child  
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if  
the anchors hold the seat in place.  
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk  
of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS  
Utility vehicles and trucks handle  
differently than passenger cars in  
the various driving conditions that  
are encountered on streets,  
highways and off-road. Utility  
vehicles and trucks are not designed  
for cornering at speeds as high as  
passenger cars any more than  
low-slung sports cars are designed  
to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions.  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious  
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:  
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;  
Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;  
Keep tires properly inflated;  
Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and  
Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt. All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants  
must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury  
or ejection.  
Study your “Owner’s Manual” and any supplements for specific  
information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and  
additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS  
4WD and AWD Systems  
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD has the ability to use all four  
wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to  
safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional  
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.  
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power  
transfer unit. You should become thoroughly familiar with this  
information before you operate your vehicle.  
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD  
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may  
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction  
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive  
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
SUV and trucks can differ from  
some other vehicles in a few  
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may  
be:  
Higher – to allow higher load  
carrying capacity and to allow it  
to travel over rough terrain  
without getting hung up or  
damaging underbody components.  
Shorter – to give it the capability  
to approach inclines and drive  
over the crest of a hill without  
getting hung up or damaging  
underbody components. All other  
things held equal, a shorter  
wheelbase may make your vehicle  
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer  
wheelbase.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Narrower — to provide greater  
maneuverability in tight spaces,  
particularly in off-road use.  
As a result of the above dimensional  
differences, SUV’s and trucks often  
will have a higher center of gravity  
and a greater difference in center of  
gravity between the loaded and  
unloaded condition.  
These differences that make your  
vehicle so versatile also make it  
handle differently than an ordinary  
passenger car.  
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
New vehicles are fitted with tires  
that have a rating on them called  
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality  
grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall  
between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For  
example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United  
States Department of Transportation has set.  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger  
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim  
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in  
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).  
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.  
Department of Transportation requires Mazda Motor Corporation to give  
you the following information about tire grades exactly as the  
government has written it.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual  
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA A B C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The  
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include  
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction  
characteristics.  
Temperature A B C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the  
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either  
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and  
possible tire failure.  
TIRES  
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they  
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Glossary of tire terminology  
Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,  
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle  
can carry.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of  
each tire providing information about the tire brand and  
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred  
to as DOT code.  
Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing  
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s  
load carrying capability.  
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].  
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase  
the tire’s load carrying capability.  
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.  
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.  
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has  
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and  
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on  
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.  
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the  
front door.  
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that  
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.  
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly  
upon which the tire beads are seated.  
INFLATING YOUR TIRES  
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly  
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure  
without appearing flat.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the  
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if  
required.  
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check  
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate  
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda Motor  
Corporation.  
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare  
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly  
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station  
gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or  
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.  
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire  
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause  
uneven treadwear patterns.  
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire  
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation  
or ؆blowout؆, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and  
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall  
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and  
internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary  
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.  
A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to  
be flat!  
Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure  
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found  
on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located  
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire  
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and  
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s  
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the  
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally  
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure  
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire  
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.  
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the  
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or  
Tire Label.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also  
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop  
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures  
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.  
To check the pressure in your tire(s):  
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving  
even a mile.  
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more  
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are  
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above  
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold  
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.  
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check  
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure  
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air  
pressure inside to go up as you drive.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire  
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.  
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.  
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in  
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
4. Replace the valve cap.  
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.  
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the  
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare  
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at  
60psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar  
Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and  
maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown  
on the Tire Label.  
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other  
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air  
leak.  
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or  
bulges.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
TIRE CARE  
Inspecting your tires  
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and  
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the  
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from  
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for  
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If  
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and  
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,  
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be  
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear  
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and  
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:  
Tire wear  
When the tread is worn down to  
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must  
be replaced to help prevent your  
vehicle from skidding and  
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear  
indicators, or “wear bars”, which  
look like narrow strips of smooth  
rubber across the tread will appear  
on the tire when the tread is worn  
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).  
When the tire tread wears down to  
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be  
replaced.  
Damage  
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as  
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and  
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected  
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged  
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also  
recommended.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Age  
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as  
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,  
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their  
lives.  
In general, tires should be replaced after 6 years regardless of  
tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent  
high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and  
may require tires to be replaced more frequently.  
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road  
tires or after 6 years due to aging even if it has not been used.  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all  
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size  
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was  
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After  
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th  
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for  
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect  
requires a recall.  
Tire Replacement Requirements  
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and  
handling capability.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the  
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric  
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those  
originally provided by Mazda. The recommended tire and wheel  
size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge  
of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these  
labels then you should consult your Mazda dealer. Use of any  
tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety  
and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death. Additionally the use of  
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,  
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If  
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an  
authorized dealer.  
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you  
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the  
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional  
precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the  
maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.  
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi  
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the  
following precautions must be taken to protect the person  
mounting the tire:  
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.  
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.  
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel  
assembly.  
4. Use both eye and ear protection.  
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the  
maximum pressure, a Mazda Dealer or other tire service  
professional should do the mounting.  
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the  
person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the  
tire wheel assembly.  
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be  
replaced as a pair.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Important: Remember to replace the valve stems when the road tires  
are replaced on your vehicle.  
Note: The use of a different tire can effect the fuel economy of your  
vehicle.  
The tire pressure monitoring sensors mounted in the wheels (originally  
installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket  
wheels.  
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Mazda Motor  
Corporation may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System.  
Safety practices  
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.  
Observe posted speed limits  
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking  
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do  
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire  
and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three  
to five seconds.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Highway hazards  
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you  
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the  
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but  
your safety is more important.  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you  
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your  
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and  
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,  
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If  
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair  
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Tire and wheel alignment  
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your  
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your  
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be  
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment  
periodically.  
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid  
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.  
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear  
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.  
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and  
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.  
Tire rotation  
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the  
Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing  
better tire performance and longer tire life.  
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)  
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive  
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.  
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a  
Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire  
imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.  
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A  
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is  
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If  
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use  
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.  
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked  
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.  
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Information on “P” type tires  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a  
tire size, load index and speed  
rating. The definitions of these  
items are listed below. (Note that  
the tire size, load index and speed  
rating for your vehicle may be  
different from this example.)  
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that may be used for  
service on cars, SUVs, minivans  
and light trucks.  
Note: If your tire size does not  
begin with a letter this may mean it  
is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire  
Manufacturing Association).  
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from  
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the  
wider the tire.  
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width.  
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change  
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the  
new wheel diameter.  
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how  
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your  
Owner’s Manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the  
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods  
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.  
The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load  
and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted  
for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph  
(130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the  
following chart.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
Letter rating  
Speed rating - mph (km/h)  
81 mph (130 km/h)  
87 mph (140 km/h)  
99 mph (159 km/h)  
106 mph (171 km/h)  
112 mph (180 km/h)  
118 mph (190 km/h)  
124 mph (200 km/h)  
130 mph (210 km/h)  
149 mph (240 km/h)  
168 mph (270 km/h)  
186 mph (299 km/h)  
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph  
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For  
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire  
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with  
the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal  
standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire  
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the  
tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of  
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501  
means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are  
identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to  
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.  
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or  
AT: All Terrain, or  
AS: All Season.  
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number  
of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire  
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply  
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon,  
polyester, and others.  
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and  
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or  
the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your  
vehicle.  
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150  
would wear one and one-half (112) times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement  
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its  
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire  
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at  
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is  
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation  
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set  
lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.  
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such  
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type  
tires  
“LT” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that is intended for  
service on light trucks.  
2. Load Range/Load Inflation  
Limits: Indicates the tire’s  
load-carrying capabilities and its  
inflation limits.  
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)  
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates  
the maximum load and tire  
pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the  
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).  
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;  
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Information on “T” type tires  
“T” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire  
size.  
Note: The temporary tire size for  
your vehicle may be different from  
this example.  
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,  
designated by the Tire and Rim  
Association (T&RA), that is  
intended for temporary service  
on cars, SUVs, minivans and  
light trucks.  
2. 145: Indicates the nominal  
width of the tire in millimeters  
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the  
number, the wider the tire.  
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.  
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.  
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change  
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the  
new wheel diameter.  
Location of the tire label  
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size  
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the  
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)  
Each tire, including the spare (if  
provided), should be checked  
monthly when cold and inflated to  
the inflation pressure recommended  
by the vehicle manufacturer on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires  
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure  
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should  
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the  
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the  
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces  
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire  
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger  
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator  
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS  
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.  
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.  
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as  
the malfunction exists.  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be  
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions  
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of  
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction  
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the  
TPMS to continue to function properly.  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC  
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a  
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire  
pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly)  
using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase  
the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and  
personal injury.  
Changing tires with TPMS  
Each road tire is equipped with  
a tire pressure sensor fastened  
to the inside rim of the wheel.  
The pressure sensor is covered  
by the tire and is not visible  
unless the tire is removed. The  
pressure sensor is located  
opposite (180 degrees) from the  
valve stem. Care must be taken  
when changing the tire to avoid  
damaging the sensor. It is  
recommended that you always have  
your tires serviced by an authorized  
dealer.  
The tire pressure should be checked  
periodically (at least monthly) using  
an accurate tire gauge, refer to  
Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four  
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low  
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is  
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under  
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire  
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,  
your tire pressure still needs to be checked.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
When your temporary spare tire is installed  
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary  
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you  
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on  
your vehicle.  
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,  
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your  
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS  
in this section.  
When you believe your system is not operating properly  
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you  
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is  
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the  
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System:  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)  
under-inflated  
1. Check your tire pressure to  
ensure tires are properly  
inflated; refer to Inflating  
your tires in this chapter.  
2. After inflating your tires to  
the manufacturer’s  
recommended inflation  
pressure as shown on the Tire  
Label (located on the edge of  
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),  
the vehicle must be driven for  
at least two minutes over 20  
mph (32 km/h) before the light  
will turn OFF.  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel/tire and reinstall it on  
the vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
on how the system functions,  
refer to When your temporary  
spare tire is installed in this  
section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the light  
remains ON, have the system  
inspected by your authorized  
dealer.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Flashing Warning  
Light  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel and re-mount it on the  
vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
of how the system functions  
under these conditions, refer to  
When your temporary spare  
tire is installed in this section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the TPMS  
warning light still flashes, have  
the system inspected by your  
authorized dealer.  
When inflating your tires  
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your  
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond  
immediately to the air added to your tires.  
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the  
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended  
inflation pressure.  
How temperature affects your tire pressure  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in  
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical  
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi  
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary  
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the  
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi  
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This  
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly  
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS  
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is  
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more  
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest  
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the  
recommended inflation pressure.  
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS  
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the  
tires you currently have on your vehicle.  
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in  
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow  
tires and cables. If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel  
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip  
aluminum wheels.  
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:  
SAE class “S” cables should ONLY be used on the front axle for  
P235/70R16 tires.  
Install cables securely, verifying that the cables or chains do not touch  
any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.  
Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against the  
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the  
cables to prevent vehicle damage.  
Avoid overloading your vehicle.  
Remove the cables when they are no longer needed.  
Do not use cables on dry roads.  
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.  
Consult your authorized dealer for information on other Mazda Motor  
Corporation approved methods of traction control.  
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or  
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating  
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will  
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading  
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining  
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s  
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:  
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of  
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or  
optional equipment.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you  
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket  
equipment.  
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the  
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found  
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door  
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire  
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND  
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for  
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum  
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket  
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the  
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the  
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.  
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle  
can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is  
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle  
should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of  
your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space  
available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can  
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Example only:  
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,  
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load  
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle  
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These  
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total  
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in  
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
authorized dealer.  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +  
passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating) – is the maximum  
allowable weight of the fully loaded  
vehicle (including all options,  
equipment, passengers and cargo).  
The GVWR is shown on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label located on the B-Pillar or  
the edge of the driver’s door.  
The GVW must never exceed the  
GVWR.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard  
vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or  
structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of  
control and personal injury.  
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle  
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and  
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.  
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at  
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for  
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the  
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.  
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.  
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a  
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only  
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of  
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel  
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized  
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.  
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount  
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.  
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000  
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.  
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply  
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to  
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load  
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may  
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement  
tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase  
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.  
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could  
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.  
Steps for determining the correct load limit:  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that  
will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from  
XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded  
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be  
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this  
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:  
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load  
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and  
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh  
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -  
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have  
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and  
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x  
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement  
from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have  
been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle  
with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg)  
bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the  
cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg),  
the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -  
1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that  
much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x  
99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need to  
reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove  
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:  
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have  
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In  
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x  
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.  
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your  
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.  
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and  
utility-type vehicles  
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation  
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle  
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Manual.  
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than  
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and  
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a  
heavily loaded vehicle.  
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.  
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and  
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.  
TRAILER TOWING  
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow  
option package.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transaxle,  
axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to maximize  
vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment while towing.  
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:  
Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.  
Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to  
tow in this chapter.  
Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving  
while you tow in this chapter.  
Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the  
severe duty schedule in the service maintenance section.  
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least  
500 miles (800 km).  
Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the  
proper installation and adjustment specifications.  
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Certification label. For  
load specification terms found on the label, refer to Vehicle loading in  
this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded  
trailer when figuring the total weight.  
FWD  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Engine Maximum GCWR Trailer Weight  
Maximum  
- lb. (kg)  
Range - lb. (kg) frontal area of  
trailer - ft2 (m2)  
2.3L  
4820 (2186)  
1000 (454)  
24 (2.2)  
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1000 ft.  
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on  
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the completed  
towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the GCWR.  
Your Hybrid vehicle is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s)  
as specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for  
trailers over a specified weight. Your Hybrid vehicle electrical system is  
not equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4WD  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Engine Maximum GCWR Trailer Weight  
Maximum  
- lb. (kg)  
Range - lb. (kg) frontal area of  
trailer - ft2 (m2)  
2.3L  
4980 (2259)  
1000 (454)  
24 (2.2)  
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1000 ft.  
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on  
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the completed  
towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the GCWR.  
Your Hybrid vehicle is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s)  
as specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for  
trailers over a specified weight. Your Hybrid vehicle electrical system is  
not equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the certification label.  
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended  
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could  
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural  
damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal  
injury.  
Preparing to tow  
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is  
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a  
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.  
Hitches  
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load  
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that  
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.  
Safety chains  
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to hook retainers on the  
vehicle. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the  
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency  
gives to you.  
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.  
Trailer brakes  
Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type brakes, if compatible with the  
vehicle, are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s  
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal  
regulations.  
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system  
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not  
have enough braking power and your chances of having a  
collision greatly increase.  
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the  
GVWR not GCWR.  
Trailer lamps  
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running  
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Do not  
connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle’s tail lamps. This can cause  
damage to your vehicle’s electrical system. See your authorized dealer or  
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking  
up trailer lamps.  
Driving while you tow  
When towing a trailer:  
Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first  
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle  
starts.  
Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off  
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.  
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.  
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.  
Servicing after towing  
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more  
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance  
information for more information.  
Trailer towing tips  
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to  
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make  
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.  
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.  
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do  
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become  
less effective.  
The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer  
weight.  
If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly  
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider  
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so  
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for  
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle  
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a  
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done  
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.  
After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your  
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.  
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must  
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.  
Launching or retrieving a boat  
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer  
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the  
trailer is removed from the water.  
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:  
do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of  
the rear bumper.  
do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the  
bottom edge of the rear bumper.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:  
causing internal damage to the components.  
affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.  
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in  
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed  
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.  
RECREATIONAL TOWING  
An example of “recreational towing” is towing your vehicle behind a  
motorhome.  
Your vehicle may be Љflat-towedЉ (all wheels on the ground) by shifting  
the transmission into Neutral. This is permitted for Front Wheel Drive  
(FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles. Your vehicle may be towed  
up to a speed of 120 km/h (75 mph) but you should always obey local  
speed limits.  
You also have the option of trailering the vehicle with its front wheels on  
a dolly (FWD only), or trailering with all four wheels off the ground.  
For other towing requirements, refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside  
Emergencies chapter.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
STARTING  
Positions of the ignition  
1. LOCK, locks the gearshift lever  
and allows key removal.  
2. ACCESSORY, allows the  
electrical accessories such as  
the radio to operate while the  
vehicle is not running.  
3. RUN, all electrical circuits  
operational and warning lights  
will illuminate. This is the  
position the key is in when  
you’re driving.  
4. START, starts the engine, vehicle and electrical power systems.  
Preparing to start your vehicle  
Engine starting is controlled by the electronically-controlled  
Continuously Variable Transaxle (eCVT). For more information on  
starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the vehicle in this chapter.  
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce  
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,  
creating the risk of fire or other damage.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in  
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open  
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding  
against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,  
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive  
if you smell exhaust fumes.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Important safety precautions  
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute  
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in  
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down  
automatically, have the vehicle checked.  
Before starting the vehicle:  
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their seat belts. For  
more information on seat belts and their proper usage, refer to the  
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
2. Make sure vehicle accessories are off.  
Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
Make sure the gearshift lever is in  
P (Park).  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
3. Turn the key to 3 (RUN)  
without turning the key to 4  
(START).  
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and  
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information  
regarding the warning lights.  
Starting the vehicle  
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN)  
without turning the key to 4  
(START). If there is difficulty in  
turning the key, rotate the  
steering wheel until the key  
turns freely. This condition may  
occur when:  
the front wheels are turned  
a front wheel is against the curb  
2. Turn the key to 4 (START),  
then release the key. After the  
vehicle has been started, a  
vehicle symbol (called the  
Ready Indicator Light) will  
appear in the instrument cluster  
to indicate the vehicle is on. This indicator will remain on while the  
vehicle is on, whether the engine is running or not, to indicate the  
vehicle is capable of movement (using its electric motor, engine, or  
both).  
Note: After starting the vehicle, the engine may stop running to  
conserve fuel after it is warmed-up and the high voltage battery is  
sufficiently charged.  
Note: If the vehicle does not start, put the gearshift lever into P (Park),  
turn the ignition off, then attempt to start the vehicle again. If the  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
vehicle still does not start, it may require refueling, jump starting,  
resetting of the fuel pump/high voltage shut-off switches or service. For  
information on jump starting the vehicle and resetting the fuel  
pump/high voltage shut-off switches, refer to the Jump starting your  
vehicle (low voltage [underhood] battery only) section, the Jump  
starting the high voltage battery section, and the Fuel pump/High  
voltage shut-off switches section found in the Roadside Emergencies  
chapter.  
Guarding against exhaust fumes  
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid  
its dangerous effects.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,  
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive  
if you smell exhaust fumes.  
Important ventilating information  
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of  
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating  
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.  
An engine block/high voltage battery heater warms the engine coolant  
and high voltage battery cells which aids in starting and allows the  
heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle is equipped  
with this system, your equipment includes a heater element which is  
installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user  
to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical source. The  
block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach  
below 0°F (-17°C).  
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions  
could result in property damage or physical harm.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use  
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged  
(cheater) adapters.  
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for  
proper and safe operation:  
For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product  
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used  
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ЉSuitable for Use  
with Outdoor Appliances.Љ Never use an indoor extension cord  
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.  
Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.  
Use as short an extension cord as possible.  
Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord  
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to  
the outlet without stretching.  
Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not  
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at  
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate  
extension cords over a period of time.  
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with  
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.  
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good  
condition before use.  
Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine  
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order  
to prevent possible shock or fire.  
Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of  
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and  
similar items.  
Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord  
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to  
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure  
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system  
has been operating for approximately a half hour.  
Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall  
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.  
How to use the engine block heater  
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean  
them, use a dry cloth.  
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block  
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts  
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not  
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after  
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3  
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use  
additional electricity.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the  
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the  
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.  
BRAKES  
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding  
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out  
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has  
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the  
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.  
Refer to Brake system warning  
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter for information on the brake  
system warning light.  
BRAKE  
Under normal operating conditions, brake dust may accumulate on the  
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not  
contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with  
emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations  
can lead to more dust than in the past. Brake dust can be cleaned by  
weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can  
be removed with Mazda Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A).  
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This  
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by  
keeping the brakes from locking. The hydraulic brake system used for  
regenerative braking is different from other vehicles. The noise from the  
ABS pump motor and the brake pedal pulsation are much less than on  
vehicles with conventional ABS. Noise and pedal pulsation during ABS  
may not be noticed.  
The sliding car symbol in the  
instrument cluster will be  
illuminated during ABS braking.  
The hydraulic brake system used for regenerative braking will charge its  
hydraulic system at the beginning of a trip and discharge the system at  
the end of each trip. You may notice a pumping sound when you enter  
the vehicle or a venting sound a few minutes after parking the vehicle.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Using ABS  
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake  
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the  
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping  
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain  
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,  
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.  
ABS warning lamp  
The ABS lamp in the instrument  
cluster momentarily illuminates  
ABS  
when the ignition is turned on. If  
the light does not illuminate during  
start up, remains on or flashes, the  
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.  
Even when the ABS is disabled,  
normal braking is still effective. (If  
your BRAKE warning lamp  
illuminates with the parking brake  
released, have your brake system  
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)  
!
P
BRAKE  
Regenerative Braking System (RBS)  
Your vehicle uses a feature known as regenerative braking. This is used  
to simulate the engine braking of an internal combustion engine and  
assist the standard brake system while recovering some of the energy of  
motion back into the battery to improve fuel economy. The standard  
brake system is designed to fully stop the car if regenerative braking is  
not available. During regenerative braking, the motor is spun as a  
generator to create electrical current. This recharges the high voltage  
battery and slows the vehicle. In effect, once the accelerator pedal is  
released, the motor changes from an energy user to an energy producer.  
When the accelerator pedal is released or the brake pedal is applied, the  
brake controller automatically detects the amount of deceleration  
requested and optimizes how much of the deceleration will be produced  
by regenerative braking. The remaining portion is generated by standard  
friction braking. When the battery is almost fully charged, the amount of  
regenerative braking is limited to avoid overcharging, and the requested  
deceleration is produced by standard friction braking alone.  
Regenerative braking does not take the place of the standard friction  
brakes; it only assists them. Regenerative braking has also been designed  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
to interact with the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Regenerative braking  
is disabled when the ABS is activated or the battery is fully charged.  
Parking brake  
Apply the parking brake whenever  
the vehicle is parked. To set the  
parking brake, press the parking  
brake pedal down until the pedal  
stops.  
The BRAKE warning lamp in the  
!
P
instrument cluster illuminates and  
remains illuminated (when the  
ignition is turned ON) until the  
parking brake is released.  
BRAKE  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).  
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.  
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop  
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the  
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the  
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Pull the release lever to release the  
brake. Driving with the parking  
brake on will cause the brakes to  
wear out quickly and reduce fuel  
economy.  
STEERING  
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering  
(EPAS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.  
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the  
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes  
more effort. Under extreme usage conditions, the steering effort may  
increase. This occurs to prevent overheating and permanent damage to  
your steering system. If this should occur, you will neither lose the ability  
to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage.  
Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and  
steering assist will return to normal.  
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:  
an improperly inflated tire  
uneven tire wear  
loose or worn suspension components  
loose or worn steering components  
improper steering alignment  
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering  
seem to wander/pull.  
PREPARING TO DRIVE  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt.  
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground  
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger  
car.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with  
a lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any  
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform  
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns,  
excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure  
to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of  
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.  
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,  
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload  
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at  
slower speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing  
for increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded  
vehicle. Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can  
deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle  
control and vehicle rollover.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION  
Brake-shift interlock  
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents  
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is  
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.  
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in  
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a  
fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly.  
Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
2. Using a screwdriver or similar  
tool, carefully pry out the small  
Brake Transmission Shift  
Interlock (BTSI) cover cap  
located to the right of the  
gearshift lever.  
3. Depress the brake pedal and  
then start the vehicle.  
4. Insert a screwdriver or similar  
tool straight down into the  
access hole and press downward  
while pulling the gearshift lever  
out of the P (Park) position and  
into the N (Neutral) position.  
5. Remove tool and reinstall BTSI cover cap.  
6. Release the parking brake and drive normally.  
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the  
brakelamps are working.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as  
possible.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Understanding the gearshift positions of the  
electronically-controlled Continuously Variable Transaxle (eCVT)  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Release the parking brake  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle is free to roll; hold  
the brake pedal down while in this position. Because of the unique  
nature of the hybrid vehicle, the engine will not start in the N (Neutral)  
position.  
The vehicle does not charge the high voltage battery in the N (Neutral)  
position. Do not idle the vehicle in N (Neutral) for extended periods as  
this will discharge your high voltage battery.  
D (Drive)  
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy.  
L (Low)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
The transmission may be shifted into L (Low) at any vehicle speed.  
WARNING: When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of  
the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make  
sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). Turn off  
the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. Never leave your  
vehicle unattended while it is running. If you do not take these  
precautions, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure  
someone.  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the  
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.  
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation  
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in  
this chapter.  
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent 4WD System that  
continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
power distribution between the front and rear wheels. It combines  
transparent all-surface operation with highly capable four-wheel drive.  
The 4WD system is always active and requires no driver input. It is  
capable of handling all road conditions, including street and highway  
driving as well as off-road and winter driving.  
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles  
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and  
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat  
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your  
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without  
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.  
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle  
differently than an ordinary passenger car.  
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.  
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel  
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not  
grip the spokes.  
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as  
rocks and stumps.  
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before  
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain  
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four  
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.  
Basic operating principles  
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering  
characteristics of your vehicle.  
Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by  
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but  
avoid severe brake application, and ease the vehicle back onto the  
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering  
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.  
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow  
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose  
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too  
sharply or abruptly.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway  
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a  
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide  
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the  
safety of others should be your primary concern.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than  
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel  
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high  
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are  
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in  
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death.  
If your vehicle gets stuck  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage  
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may  
overheat.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Emergency maneuvers  
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn  
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,  
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid  
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,  
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or  
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are  
required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could  
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover  
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the  
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.  
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not  
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than  
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel  
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high  
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are  
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in  
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death.  
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from  
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle  
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,  
avoid these abrupt inputs.  
Sand  
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid  
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures and drive steadily  
through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the  
wheels.  
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you  
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may  
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back  
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Mud and water  
If you must drive through high  
water, drive slowly. Traction or  
brake capability may be limited.  
When driving through water,  
determine the depth; avoid water  
higher than the bottom of the hubs  
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If  
the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.  
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the  
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving  
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you  
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As  
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid  
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of  
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.  
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,  
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.  
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.  
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should  
be replaced.  
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts  
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an  
imbalance that could damage drive components.  
“Tread Lightly” is an educational  
program designed to increase public  
awareness of land-use regulations  
and responsibilities in our nation’s  
wilderness areas. Mazda Motor  
Corporation joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land  
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and  
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain  
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up  
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up  
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep  
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and  
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand  
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without  
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse  
over a hill without the aid of an observer.  
If you do stall out, do not try to  
turn around because you might roll  
over. It is better to back down to a  
safe location.  
Apply just enough power to the  
wheels to climb the hill. Too much  
power will cause the tires to slip,  
spin or lose traction, resulting in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Do not descend a hill in N (Neutral)  
and avoid sudden hard braking as  
you could lose control.  
Since your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not  
“pump” the brakes.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Driving on snow and ice  
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but  
can skid like any other vehicle.  
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the  
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.  
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on  
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting  
from a full stop.  
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate  
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any  
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do  
not become overconfident as to road conditions.  
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles  
for stopping; drive slower than usual. Since your vehicle is equipped with  
a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily.  
Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter  
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.  
4WD vehicles should be driven with traction devices as referred to in  
Using snow tires and traction devices in the Tires, Wheels and  
Loading chapter.  
Maintenance and Modifications  
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed  
and tested to provide durable load carrying capability and predictable  
performance whether loaded or empty. For this reason, Mazda Motor  
Corporation strongly recommends that you do not make modifications  
such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or  
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.  
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make  
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.  
Mazda Motor Corporation recommends that caution be used with any  
vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or  
pickup box cover).  
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase  
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities  
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of  
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to  
heavy off-road usage.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  
If driving through deep or standing  
water is unavoidable, proceed very  
slowly especially when the depth is  
not known. Never drive through  
water that is higher than the bottom  
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the  
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).  
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.  
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your  
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where  
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the  
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.  
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your  
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL  
The hazard flasher is located on the  
steering column, just behind the  
steering wheel. The hazard flashers  
will operate when the ignition is in  
any position or if the key is not in  
the ignition.  
Push in the flasher control and all  
front and rear direction signals will  
flash. Press the flasher control again  
to turn them off. Use it when your  
vehicle is disabled and is creating a  
safety hazard for other motorists.  
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your low voltage  
(underhood) battery.  
FUEL PUMP/HIGH VOLTAGE SHUT-OFF SWITCHES  
The fuel pump shut-off switch stops the electric fuel pump from sending  
fuel to the engine and the high voltage shut-off switch shuts off power  
from the high voltage battery when your vehicle receives a substantial  
physical jolt.  
After an accident, if the engine does not start, one or both of the  
switches may have been activated.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The fuel pump shut-off switch is  
located in the front passenger’s  
footwell, behind a flip-up cover.  
The high voltage shut-off switch is  
located in the cargo area on the  
passenger side of the vehicle in the  
jack compartment, behind the jack  
access door. The switch is located  
behind the jack.  
To reset the switch(es):  
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK.  
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.  
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset  
button. Both switches should be checked and reset.  
4. Turn the ignition to RUN.  
5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to LOCK.  
6. Make another check for leaks.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the fuel pump shut-off or try to  
start your vehicle; you could injure yourself or others. Have all the  
passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a  
towing service.  
FUSES AND RELAYS  
Fuses  
If electrical components in the  
vehicle are not working, a fuse may  
have blown. Blown fuses are  
identified by a broken wire within  
the fuse. Check the appropriate  
15  
fuses before replacing any electrical  
components.  
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage  
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire  
damage and could start a fire.  
Standard fuse amperage rating and color  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
2A  
3A  
4A  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
5A  
7.5A  
10A  
15A  
20A  
25A  
30A  
40A  
50A  
60A  
Brown  
Red  
Brown  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Orange  
Red  
Blue  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
70A  
80A  
Tan  
Natural  
Brown  
Black  
Black  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
The fuse panel is located on the  
right-hand side of the center  
console, by the instrument panel.  
Remove the panel cover to access  
the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the  
top and bottom of the fuse cover to  
remove.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
30A  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Not used (spare)  
Brake On/Off switch  
Not used (spare)  
1
2
3
4
5
15A  
15A  
30A  
10A  
110V inverter  
Brake Shift Interlock (BSI), SPDJB,  
Keypad illumination  
Turn signals, Stop lamps  
Low beam headlamps (left)  
Low beam headlamps (right)  
Interior lights  
6
7
8
20A  
10A  
10A  
15A  
15A  
10A  
7.5A  
7.5A  
10A  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Backlighting  
Four wheel drive  
Power mirror switch  
Canister vent  
FCIM (radio buttons), Satellite radio,  
Front display module  
Climate control  
Not used (spare)  
All lock motor feeds, Liftgate release,  
Liftglass release  
15  
16  
17  
10A  
15A  
20A  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
20A  
25A  
15A  
15A  
15A  
15A  
20A  
10A  
10A  
20A  
Heated seat  
Rear wiper  
Datalink  
Fog lamps  
Park lamps  
High beam headlamps  
Horn relay  
Demand lamps  
Instrument panel cluster  
Ignition switch  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
5A  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Radio  
28  
29  
30  
5A  
5A  
Instrument panel cluster  
Not used (spare)  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
10A  
10A  
10A  
5A  
10A  
5A  
Compass module  
Restraints control module  
Speed control switch  
Speed control deactivate switch, ABS  
Four wheel drive, EPAS (steering)  
PATS transceiver  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
10A  
20A  
20A  
20A  
15A  
10A  
10A  
Climate control  
Subwoofer/Amp (Audiophile radio)  
Radio  
Front power point  
Driver/passenger door lock switches  
Not used (spare)  
Rear wiper logic, Heated seats relay,  
Auto dimming mirror, Instrument  
cluster  
44  
45  
46  
47  
10A  
5A  
7.5A  
Not used (spare)  
Front wiper logic, Blower motor relay  
OCS (restraints), PADI (restraints)  
30A Circuit Power windows, Moon roof  
Breaker  
48  
Delayed accessory relay  
Power distribution box  
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The  
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your  
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.  
WARNING: Always disconnect the low voltage (underhood)  
battery before servicing high current fuses.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace  
the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the  
low voltage (underhood) battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.  
If the low voltage (underhood) battery has been disconnected and  
reconnected, refer to the Low voltage (underhood) battery section of  
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
The fuses are coded as follows.  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
80A Midi  
125A Midi  
15A*  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Power steering control module  
PDB  
Heated mirror  
Rear defroster  
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
30A**  
20A**  
20A**  
10A*  
Rear power point  
Fuel injector  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
Keep Alive power, TBCM  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)  
Reverse lamps  
Transaxle Control Module (TCM)  
ABS  
6
7
8
9
5A*  
10A*  
5A*  
50A**  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
30A**  
30A**  
40A**  
10A*  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Front wipers  
PCM/Power sustain  
Blower motor  
A/C clutch  
Heater/Coolant pump  
Traction Battery Control Module  
(TBCM)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
10A*  
50A**  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21A  
21B  
21C  
21D  
22  
40A**  
40A**  
50A**  
30A**  
Cooling fan 1  
Cooling fan 2  
ABS solenoid  
Power seats  
A/C clutch relay  
Rear defroster relay  
Not used  
Blower relay  
PCM relay  
Not used  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
5A*  
20A*  
15A*  
5A*  
10A*  
15A*  
TBCM  
Fuel pump  
Ignition coils  
TBCM  
Cooling fan/TCM  
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen  
(HEGO) sensor  
PCM power  
Cooling fan 1 relay  
Power sustain relay  
Cooling fan main relay  
Cooling fan 2 relay  
Reverse lamp relay  
Injector relay  
29  
15A*  
30A  
30B  
30C  
30D  
31A  
31B  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Heater pump relay  
Coolant pump relay  
Not used  
Not used  
A/C clutch diode  
PCM diode  
Not used  
Location  
31C  
31D  
31E  
31F  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
5A*  
RUN/START  
Not used  
37  
Not used  
* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
If you get a flat tire while driving:  
do not brake heavily.  
gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.  
hold the steering wheel firmly.  
slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is  
different in one or more of the following: type, brand, size, speed rating  
and tread design. If this is the case, this dissimilar spare tire is still rated  
for your vehicle loads (GAWR and GVWR). This temporary spare tire is  
not equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor.  
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will  
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of  
the TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure  
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.  
Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent  
damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels, and Loading chapter. Replace the spare  
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of  
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for  
damage.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.  
WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
in the Tire, Wheels and Loading chapter for important  
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes  
damaged, it will no longer function.  
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information  
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.  
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for  
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should  
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size  
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by  
Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be  
replaced rather than repaired.  
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that  
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels  
and can be one of three types:  
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire  
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall  
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire  
has a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR  
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”  
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:  
Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)  
Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the  
Safety Compliance Label  
Tow a trailer  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel  
location can lead to impairment of the following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:  
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire/wheel  
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to  
impairment of the following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)  
Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional  
caution should be given to:  
Towing a trailer  
Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body  
Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack  
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and  
seek service as soon as possible.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Stopping and securing the vehicle  
1. Park on a level surface, set the  
parking brake and activate the  
hazard flashers.  
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)  
and turn engine off.  
Removing the jack and tools  
The jack and tools are located in the  
right rear of the cargo area behind  
an access panel.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
To remove jack from vehicle:  
1. Release the thumbscrew on the  
bracket.  
2. Release the retention clip on  
the upper part of the jack  
bracket.  
3. Dislodge the jack from the  
bracket and carefully guide jack  
down and out through trim  
opening, upper end out first.  
Remove the lug wrench from the  
jack in order to remove the spare  
tire from under the vehicle.  
Removing the spare tire or spare tire and tether (if equipped)  
1. Insert the lug wrench through  
the access hole in the rear  
bumper.  
2. Turn the handle  
counterclockwise and lower the  
spare tire until it can be slid  
rearward and the cable is slack.  
3. Slide the retainer through the  
center of the wheel.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
If equipped with a tether, perform the following additional steps:  
4. Lift the spare tire on end to  
access tether attachment (1).  
5. Use the lug wrench to remove  
the lug nut from the spare tire  
tether.  
6. If not replacing the spare or flat  
tire to the underbody storage  
area, raise winch up into the  
installed position.  
7. Use the attached fastener strap  
(2) to tie the tether end to the  
winch actuator shaft (if  
equipped).  
Tire change procedure  
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the  
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or  
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you  
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in  
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other  
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.  
WARNING: Changing a tire is dangerous if not done properly.  
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be  
seriously injured. Be sure to follow the directions for changing  
a tire, and never get under a vehicle that is supported only by a  
jack.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to  
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or  
changing the wheel.  
1. Block the diagonally opposite  
wheel.  
2. Loosen each wheel lug nut  
one-half turn counterclockwise  
but do not remove them until  
the wheel is raised off the  
ground.  
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack locations:  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Front  
View shown from rear of front tire.  
Position the jack directly below the  
protruding bolt.  
Rear  
View shown from forward of rear  
tire. Position jack directly below the  
stud on the rear trailing arm.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Position the jack according to  
the guides and turn the jack  
handle clockwise until the tire is  
a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm)  
off the ground.  
Never use the differentials as a  
jacking point.  
WARNING: To lessen the risk  
of personal injury, do not put  
any part of your body under  
the vehicle while changing a  
tire. Do not start the engine  
when your vehicle is on the  
jack. The jack is only meant  
for changing the tire.  
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.  
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem  
is facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against  
the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been  
lowered.  
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.  
7. Remove the jack and fully  
tighten the lug nuts in the order  
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut  
torque specifications later in  
this chapter for the proper lug  
nut torque specification.  
1
3
4
5
2
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Stowing the jack and tools  
Make sure the jack is fully lowered  
and reclip the tools onto the jack.  
Reinstall the jack and tools in the cargo area. To replace the jack in the  
vehicle,  
guide the jack bottom first in the  
trim opening and position in the  
bracket (3),  
secure the retention clip on the  
upper part of the jack (2), and  
close the thumbscrew (1).  
Make sure the jack is fastened so it  
does not rattle when you drive.  
Stowing the flat/spare tire  
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in  
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.  
If you are stowing a tire that requires reattaching it to the  
vehicle with a tether, perform these steps first, then proceed with  
the steps following.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
1. Place tire on end with valve  
stem facing rearward, away  
from vehicle.  
2. Place tether into bolt holes in  
wheel and attach lug nut using  
lug wrench.  
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing down. If your  
vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels, remove the wheel  
ornament.  
4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer  
through the center of the wheel.  
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original  
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle  
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire  
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The  
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you  
to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort,  
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your  
earliest convenience. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, guide the tire with one hand; keep the rear of the tire  
tilted down until the tire clears the bumper.  
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against  
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen  
and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire  
may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.  
(Make sure that the tire does not contact the bumper.)  
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure (every six months, per  
scheduled maintenance information), when servicing the spare  
tire pressure or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through  
service of other components.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS  
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)  
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel  
removal, etc.).  
Bolt size  
Wheel lug nut torque*  
lb.ft.  
100  
Nm  
M12 x 1.5  
135  
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and  
rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.  
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any  
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting  
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake  
drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any  
fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they  
do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.  
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the  
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen  
and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,  
resulting in loss of control.  
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole  
prior to installation. If there is  
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,  
remove loose particles by wiping  
with clean rag and apply grease.  
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot  
hole surface by smearing a “dime”  
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease  
around the wheel pilot surface (1)  
with end of finger. DO NOT apply  
grease to lugnut/stud holes or  
wheel-to-brake surfaces.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
JUMP STARTING  
(LOW VOLTAGE [UNDERHOOD] BATTERY ONLY)  
Your vehicle has two separate jump starting procedures; the following  
procedure is for the low voltage (underhood) battery only. Refer to  
Jump starting the high voltage battery in this chapter for information  
on jump starting the high voltage battery.  
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if  
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could  
result in injury or vehicle damage.  
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,  
eyes and clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission  
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start  
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic  
transmission may cause transmission damage.  
Preparing your vehicle  
If your low voltage (underhood) battery becomes disconnected or  
disabled for any reason, the vehicle controller must relearn the engine’s  
operating characteristics in order to operate it at maximum efficiency.  
This relearning process occurs the first time the vehicle is driven after  
reconnecting the low voltage battery. If the learning procedure does not  
have time to complete during the drive, the engine will continue to  
operate for 3-5 seconds after you turn the ignition off to complete the  
relearning process. This is a normal condition and will not re-occur until  
the low voltage battery is disconnected again. The brake system must  
also be reset. Refer to Low voltage (underhood) battery in the  
Maintenance and Specification chapter for more information.  
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.  
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could  
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.  
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle  
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other  
moving parts.  
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion  
before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight  
and level.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical  
surges. Turn all other accessories off.  
Connecting the jumper cables  
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the assisting battery.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the  
assisting battery.  
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed  
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and  
the carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine  
rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.  
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the  
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may  
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.  
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of  
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Jump starting  
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at  
moderately increased speed.  
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an  
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.  
Removing the jumper cables  
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were  
connected.  
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
disabled vehicle’s battery.  
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables  
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can  
relearn its idle conditions.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
JUMP STARTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY  
Your vehicle has two separate jump starting procedures; the following  
procedure is for the cargo area high voltage battery only. Refer to the  
Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage [underhood] battery only)  
section in this chapter for information on jump starting the low voltage  
(underhood) battery.  
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if  
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could  
result in injury or vehicle damage.  
WARNING: The high voltage battery contains potassium  
hydroxide (a strong alkaline electrolyte) which can burn skin,  
eyes and clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. This vehicle does not  
have push-start capability.  
If you attempt to start your vehicle and the engine cranks but does not  
start, the high voltage battery may need to be jump started.  
The Service Soon (yellow wrench)  
light in the instrument cluster may  
also be illuminated and the message  
center may display a message.  
To jump start the high voltage  
battery, turn the ignition to OFF,  
open the access panel on the end of  
the driver side instrument panel and  
press the jump start button  
momentarily. After pressing the  
button, you should wait eight  
minutes before attempting to start  
the engine, otherwise the high  
voltage battery may not receive  
sufficient charge to start the engine.  
The high voltage battery will use voltage from the low voltage  
(underhood) battery to charge itself.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
When the button is pressed, the indicator light on the button will  
illuminate. After eight minutes has passed, the indicator light will flash  
rapidly for two minutes. Turn the ignition to RUN. You may now attempt  
to start the engine. If you attempt to start the engine before the  
eight minutes passes, the jump starting procedure will stop and  
will have to be restarted if the engine does not start.  
If the engine still does not start after the first complete high voltage  
jump start, a second jump start procedure can be attempted after a  
two-minute period (indicated by the button light changing from a rapid  
flash to no illumination). This jump start procedure can only be done  
twice before the low voltage (underhood) battery becomes discharged  
and must also be jump started.  
If the jump start button is pressed, but the indicator on the button  
flashes slowly, the low voltage (underhood) battery may not have enough  
energy to charge the high voltage battery. If this occurs, refer to the  
Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage [underhood] battery only)  
section in this chapter for information on jump starting the low voltage  
(underhood) battery. You may perform another high voltage battery jump  
start by pressing the jump start button after having connected the  
jumper cables and starting the booster vehicle.  
Once the engine is started, the jumper cables should be removed as  
described in the Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage  
[underhood] battery only) section.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WRECKER TOWING  
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing  
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your  
roadside assistance service provider.  
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and  
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda Motor  
Corporation has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.  
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure  
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the  
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this  
fashion.  
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it  
is required that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a dolly to  
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle.  
On 4WD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel  
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to  
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle, 4WD system or vehicle.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle  
damage may occur.  
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access  
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your  
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat  
towed (all wheels on the ground) with the transmission placed in N  
(Neutral).  
Mazda Motor Corporation produces a towing manual for all authorized  
tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual  
for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to  
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the  
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement  
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized  
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following  
steps:  
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest  
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved  
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS  
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the  
authorized dealer or the OWNER.  
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting  
your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North  
American Operations by one of the following ways:  
Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local  
Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.  
By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom  
of the home page).  
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more  
efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration  
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda  
Distributor.  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to  
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the  
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the  
operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are  
most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your  
dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized  
dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:  
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If  
the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the  
owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.  
STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office  
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer  
Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service  
Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional  
Office nearest you for such arrangements.  
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department  
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations  
Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario  
L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Provide the Department with the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification  
label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual  
for the location of the VIN.  
4. Purchase date.  
5. Present odometer reading.  
6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.  
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service  
Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible  
has been done to ensure your satisfaction.  
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases  
requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel  
and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence  
therefore for most effective results.  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s  
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this  
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.  
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered  
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will  
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an  
independent third party through binding arbitration.  
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our  
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable  
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using  
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding  
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)  
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific  
item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an  
owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties  
cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist  
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.  
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your  
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.  
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers  
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an  
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial  
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:  
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407  
North York, Ontario  
M2J 4Y8  
http://camvap.ca  
Regional Offices  
Regional Offices  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Western Region  
8171 Ackroyd Road  
Suite 2000  
Areas Covered  
Alberta,  
British Columbia,  
Manitoba,  
Richmond, B.C.  
V6X 3K1  
Saskatchewan,  
Yukon  
(604) 303–5670  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Central Region  
55 Vogell Road  
Richmond Hill, Ontario.  
L4B 3K5  
Ontario  
1 (800) 263–4680  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region  
6111 Route Trans  
Canadienne  
Quebec,  
New Brunswick,  
Nova Scotia,  
Pointe Claire, Quebec  
H9R 5A5  
Prince Edward Island,  
Newfoundland  
(514) 694–6390  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep  
your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement  
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized  
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following  
steps:  
STEP 1  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest  
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved  
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS  
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the  
authorized dealer or the OWNER.  
STEP 2  
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please  
contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).  
Please help us by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration  
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Plaza Motors Corp.  
Mazda de Puerto Rico  
P.O. Box 362722  
San Juan, Puerto Rico  
00936–2722  
Tel: (787) 788–9300  
This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.  
That is our goal.  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda  
Distributor.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)  
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer  
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the  
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of  
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the  
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and  
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or  
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer  
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund  
or replacement vehicle.  
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer  
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership  
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs  
first:  
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR  
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or  
safety of the vehicle) OR  
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total  
of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).  
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the  
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the  
following address:  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755, Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS  
U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)  
(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
(Distributor in each area)  
CANADA  
Mazda Canada, Inc.  
55 Vogell Road  
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada  
TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)  
(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)  
PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS  
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)  
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722  
TEL: (787) 788–9300  
GUAM  
(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)  
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam  
TEL: (671) 646–9216  
SAIPAN  
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)  
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 234–7524  
Triple J Saipan, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)  
Beach Road  
Chalan LauLau  
Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 235–4868  
AMERICAN SAMOA  
Polynesia Motors, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799  
TEL: (684) 699–1854  
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA  
New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty  
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Federal Emission Control Warranty  
– Emission Defect Warranty  
– Emission Performance Warranty  
California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)  
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty  
Tire Warranty  
NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda  
portfolio.  
Outside the United States  
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles  
meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore,  
vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in  
other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle  
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly  
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.  
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,  
Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for  
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.  
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export  
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside  
of the United States:  
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or  
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the  
emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement  
parts may not be available.  
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more  
information.  
Outside Canada  
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific  
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for  
use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle  
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in  
the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda  
vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the  
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the  
United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.  
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export  
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside  
of Canada:  
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or  
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the  
emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement  
parts may not be available.  
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more  
information.  
ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES  
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in  
stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the  
manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine  
parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or  
safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you  
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:  
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be  
dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could  
seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.  
This could cause you to have an accident or increase your  
chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or  
accessories.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:  
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or  
choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential  
systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag  
(SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be  
very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical  
equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo  
systems, and car alarm systems.  
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may  
result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.  
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS  
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners  
who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.  
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer, refer to the chart below.  
If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.  
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER  
9999 95 062B 08  
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION  
WORKSHOP MANUAL  
WIRING DIAGRAM  
9999 95 038G 08  
9999 95 014C 08  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
WORKSHOP MANUAL:  
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive  
train, body and chassis.  
WIRING DIAGRAM:  
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the  
entire electrical system.  
OWNER’S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and  
operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.  
Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained  
personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely  
maintain Mazda vehicles.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash, or  
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying  
Mazda Corporation.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and  
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a  
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mazda Corporation.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at  
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;  
or write to:  
Administrator  
NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street, SW  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or  
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport  
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
WASHING THE EXTERIOR  
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral  
pH shampoo.  
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing  
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted  
surfaces.  
Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to  
strong, direct sunlight.  
Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for  
best results.  
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to  
eliminate water spotting.  
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the  
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause  
damage to the vehicle.  
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings  
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
paintwork and trim over time.  
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a  
car wash.  
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted  
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,  
wash off as soon as possible.  
Use care when washing the vehicle to ensure water and soap  
are not directed into the high voltage battery vent, located  
near the driver side rear window.  
WAXING  
Applying a premium paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will  
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.  
Wash the vehicle first. Refer to Washing the exterior for more  
detailed information.  
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use a premium liquid wax.  
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body  
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof  
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl  
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
PAINT CHIPS  
Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up  
paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.  
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar  
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.  
Always read the instructions before using the products.  
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS  
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.  
In order to maintain their shine:  
Clean with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.  
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or  
covers.  
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your  
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning  
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust  
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.  
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel  
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.  
To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil  
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available from your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
ENGINE  
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt  
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:  
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The  
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause  
damage.  
Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water  
will damage the engine or other engine components.  
Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (0000–77–410E-09), available at  
your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and  
pressure rinse clean.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning  
the engine. Note: As with all transmissions, be especially careful as  
water entry into the vents can damage internal parts.  
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the  
running engine may cause internal damage.  
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS  
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are  
available from your dealer.  
For routine cleaning, use cool or lukewarm water with a neutral pH  
shampoo.  
If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil  
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES  
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be  
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the  
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include  
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant  
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants  
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and  
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:  
The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with  
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner  
(0000–77–400E-01 and 0000–77–400E-02), available from your  
authorized Mazda dealer.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or a  
windshield washer concentrate. This washer fluid concentrate contains  
a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot  
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car  
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear  
worn or do not function properly.  
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.  
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL / INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS  
Clean the interior trim areas and instrument panel with a damp cloth,  
then with a clean, dry cloth, or use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl  
Cleaner (0000-77-430E-15).  
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of  
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the  
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.  
Do not use household or glass cleaners, as these may damage the  
finish.  
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents  
when cleaning the steering wheel, instrument panel or interior  
trim areas to avoid contamination of the airbag systems.  
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in  
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan  
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted  
surfaces.  
INTERIOR  
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, seat belts and seats equipped with side  
air bags (if equipped):  
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Remove light stains and soil with Upholstery Cleaner and Spot  
Remover (0000–77–430E-01), available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first  
with Spot and Stain Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your  
authorized Mazda dealer.  
If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the  
entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can  
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of  
the seat materials.  
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents  
when cleaning the seat where the side air bag (if equipped) is  
mounted. Such products may contaminate the side air bag  
system and affect performance of the air bag in a collision. The  
air bag may not function correctly and not provide any injury  
reduction benefits.  
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the  
leather.  
To clean, use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner  
(0000-77-430E-15), available at your authorized Mazda dealer. Dry the  
area with a soft cloth.  
To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Deluxe Leather Care  
Kit (0000-77-609E-03), available at your authorized Mazda dealer.  
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or  
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based  
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of  
the clear, protective coating.  
UNDERBODY  
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and  
door drain holes free from packed dirt.  
MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS  
Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your  
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been  
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom  
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each  
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid  
specifications. For best results, use these products or products of  
equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS  
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance  
information which makes tracking routine service easy.  
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can  
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty  
Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are covered.  
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts  
conforming to specifications. Mazda parts are designed and built to  
provide the best performance in your vehicle.  
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not work on a hot engine.  
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.  
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed  
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.  
Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away  
from the battery and all fuel related parts.  
High Voltage Information  
WARNING: Exposure to high voltage may result in severe  
personal injury or death. High voltage components must be  
serviced by a trained service technician.  
Your vehicle consists of various high voltage components and wiring. All  
of the high voltage power flows through specific wiring assemblies which  
are labeled as such and/or are covered with a solid orange convolute or  
orange stripe tape. Do not come in contact with these components.  
The following are specific locations in the rear cargo area that consist of  
high voltage components and/or wiring.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
1
2
3
1. High voltage connector shield  
2. Service Disconnect  
3. High voltage battery case  
Working with the engine off  
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in  
P (Park).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.  
Working with the engine on  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Block the wheels.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is  
running.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
OPENING THE HOOD  
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood  
release handle located under  
the bottom of the instrument  
panel.  
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift  
up on the auxiliary latch handle  
located in the center between  
the hood and the grille.  
3. Lift the hood open and secure it with the prop rod.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
2.3L I4 engine  
1. Engine coolant reservoir  
2. Motor/Electronics (M/E) coolant reservoir  
3. Engine oil filler cap  
4. Brake fluid reservoir  
5. Power distribution box  
6. Low Voltage (underhood) battery  
7. Engine air filter assembly  
8. Engine oil dipstick  
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID  
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the  
level is low. In very cold weather, do  
not fill the reservoir completely.  
Only use a washer fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Do not use any  
special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug  
wash. They may cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing.  
Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities  
section in this chapter.  
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the  
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.  
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used  
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the  
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.  
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below  
40°F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.  
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold  
weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase  
the risk of injury or accident.  
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer  
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system  
components.  
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate  
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the  
windshield.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES  
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm  
away from the glass. Turn the  
blade at a right angle to the  
arm.  
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to  
release the blade from the arm  
and pull the blade away from  
the arm to remove it.  
3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.  
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.  
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the  
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning  
chapter.  
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to  
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The  
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the  
wiper rubber element.  
Changing rear window wiper blade  
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces  
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
To replace the wiper blade:  
1. Grab the wiper arm just below  
the blade attachment and pull it  
as far away from the glass as  
possible. Do not use excessive  
force because it can break the  
wiper arm at the heel. Hold it  
there until the next step.  
2. Grab the wiper blade with your  
other hand and use your fingers  
to push the wiper arm tip  
through the wiper blade center  
to separate the blade from the arm.  
3. Attach the new wiper to the  
wiper arm and press it into  
place until a click is heard.  
If you find this procedure too  
difficult, please see your dealer.  
ENGINE OIL  
Checking the engine oil  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate  
intervals for checking the engine oil.  
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.  
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into  
the oil pan.  
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in  
P (Park).  
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.  
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it  
again.  
If the oil level is within the MIN and MAX marks or the lower and  
upper holes, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.  
If the oil level is below the MIN mark or the lower hole, engine oil  
must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range.  
If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil  
in this chapter.  
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Oil levels above the MAX  
mark or upper hole may cause engine damage. If the engine is  
overfilled, some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized  
dealer.  
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.  
Adding engine oil  
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine  
oil in this chapter.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only  
certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine  
oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.  
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the  
FULL mark on the engine oil level dipstick.  
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.  
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap  
clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it is seated.  
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the  
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.  
Engine oil and filter recommendations  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
automobile manufacturers.  
To protect your engine’s warranty use Mazda SAE 5W-20 or an  
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Mazda specification WSS-M2C930-A.  
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability  
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that  
is not covered by Mazda warranty.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule  
listed in scheduled maintenance information.  
When changing the oil filter on the 2.3L engine you must also replace  
the filter cap O-ring. The oil filter drain plug O-ring must also be  
replaced whenever the oil filter drain plug is removed. Reuse of the  
O-rings may cause engine oil leakage and may result in severe engine  
damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the  
engine if the O-rings are not replaced.  
Mazda production and aftermarket (Mazda) oil filters are designed for  
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used  
that does not meet Mazda material and design specifications, start-up  
engine noises or knock may be experienced.  
It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter or another  
with equivalent performance for your engine application.  
LOW VOLTAGE (UNDERHOOD) BATTERY  
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Mazda maintenance-free battery  
which normally does not require  
additional water during its life of  
service.  
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled  
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.  
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and  
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to  
the battery terminals.  
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables  
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the  
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.  
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to  
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner (e.g. spot lights, electric  
winch, etc.) may adversely affect vehicle performance and  
durability.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which  
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,  
sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When  
working near the battery, always shield your face and protect  
your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.  
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive  
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the  
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the  
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with  
your hands on opposite corners.  
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries  
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.  
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect  
against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid  
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a  
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If  
acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.  
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories  
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.  
If the battery is disconnected, the Regenerative Braking System will need  
to relearn the initial brake pedal position. After reconnecting the battery,  
slowly depress and release the brake pedal one time.  
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,  
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When  
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must  
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and  
performance. To begin this process:  
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.  
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the  
engine.  
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.  
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to  
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.  
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle  
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle  
trim is eventually relearned.  
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,  
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is  
reconnected.  
Always dispose of automotive  
batteries in a responsible manner.  
Follow your local authorized  
standards for disposal. Call your  
local authorized recycling center  
to find out more about recycling  
automotive batteries.  
RECYCLE  
Low and high voltage battery – storage  
Your vehicle must be started and run for a minimum of 10 minutes once  
a month in order to maintain the high voltage battery charge. This will  
maintain the high voltage battery but it is not enough to maintain the  
low voltage (underhood) battery and additional low voltage (underhood)  
battery charging may be required after 60 days.  
If your vehicle is to be stored for 30 days or longer, the low voltage  
(underhood) battery negative terminal must be disconnected. Failure to  
do this could damage your vehicle’s batteries.  
ENGINE COOLANT AND MOTOR/ELECTRONICS COOLANT  
Your vehicle is equipped with two separate coolant systems. One is for  
engine cooling and the other is for various electric motors and other  
components that are specific to the hybrid operating systems.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking engine coolant  
The concentration and level of  
engine coolant should be checked at  
the intervals listed in scheduled  
maintenance information. The  
coolant concentration should be  
maintained at 50/50 coolant and  
distilled water, which equates to a  
freeze point of -34°F (-36°C).  
Coolant concentration testing is  
possible with a hydrometer or  
antifreeze tester (such as the  
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze  
Tester, 014–R1060). The level of  
coolant should be maintained at the  
“FULL COLD” level or within the  
“COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant  
reservoir. If the level falls below, add  
coolant per the instructions in the  
Adding engine coolant section.  
When the engine is cold, check the  
level of engine coolant in the  
reservoir.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking motor/electronics (M/E) coolant  
The M/E coolant reservoir is located  
behind the engine coolant reservoir.  
Refer to the following engine  
coolant sections for all information,  
instructions and warnings related to  
cooling systems. The two systems  
use the same coolant and operate  
similarly, with the Motor and  
Electronics system generally  
operating at a lower temperature  
and pressure. The fluid levels in  
both reservoirs need to be  
maintained. When the engine is  
cold, check the level of M/E coolant  
in the reservoir.  
Factory fill and coolant specifications  
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water  
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above  
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A  
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:  
Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).  
Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.  
Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.  
Common instructions for cooling systems  
The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the  
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir  
(depending upon application).  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for service interval  
schedules.  
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your  
vehicle in this chapter.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,  
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is  
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding  
engine coolant in this chapter.  
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine  
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified  
function and vehicle location.  
Adding engine coolant  
Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine  
coolant that meets a Mazda specification.  
DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).  
DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLengine coolant or an equivalent  
engine coolant.  
DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine  
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.  
DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.  
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.  
DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your  
vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.  
DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant  
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm  
your engine’s cooling system.  
The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling  
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s  
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant  
your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer  
fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield,  
it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.  
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant  
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the  
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of  
emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the  
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of  
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone  
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,  
overheating or freezing.  
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap  
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery  
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and  
water to the “COLD FILL RANGE”. For all other vehicles, which have a  
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to  
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with  
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.  
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.  
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant  
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic  
bottle). Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins  
to release.  
3. Step back while the pressure releases.  
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the  
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.  
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see  
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD”  
level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow  
system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is  
almost full.  
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly  
installed to prevent coolant loss.  
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration.  
Refer to the Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is  
not 50/50 (protection to –34° F [–36° C]), drain some coolant and adjust  
the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a  
50/50 coolant concentration.  
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant  
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If  
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and  
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.  
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per  
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low  
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine  
damage).  
Recycled engine coolant  
Mazda Motor Corporation does NOT recommend the use of recycled  
engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Mazda Premium Gold  
Engine Coolant since a Mazda-approved recycling process is not yet  
available.  
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate  
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling  
and disposing of automotive fluids.  
Coolant refill capacity  
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer  
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant  
in this section.  
Severe climates  
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):  
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration  
above 50%.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will  
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the  
winter months.  
If you drive in extremely hot climates:  
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration  
above 40%.  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.  
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50  
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system  
and engine protection.  
FUEL FILTER  
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to  
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for  
changing the fuel filter.  
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The  
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system  
if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used.  
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS  
Important safety precautions  
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an  
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and  
fire.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel  
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait  
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.  
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.  
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,  
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system  
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may  
result in possible personal injury.  
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death  
if misused or mishandled.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a  
cancer-causing agent.  
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:  
Extinguish all smoking materials  
and any open flames before  
refueling your vehicle.  
Always turn off the vehicle before  
refueling.  
Automotive fuels can be harmful  
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if  
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,  
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately  
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.  
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind  
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,  
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious  
illness and permanent injury.  
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,  
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and  
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could  
lead to permanent injury.  
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated  
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or  
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.  
Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of  
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,  
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive  
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and  
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse  
reaction.  
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and  
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never  
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under  
certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling  
excess fumes.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can  
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is  
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.  
Refueling  
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause  
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:  
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;  
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;  
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;  
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;  
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump  
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this is against the  
law in some places;  
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children  
pump fuel.  
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when  
filling an ungrounded fuel container:  
Place approved fuel container on the ground.  
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the  
cargo area).  
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while  
filling.  
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill  
position.  
Fuel Filler Cap  
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off  
feature.  
When fueling your vehicle:  
1. Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position.  
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.  
3. To install the cap, align the lugs on the cap with the threads on the  
filler pipe.  
4. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks at least once.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If the check fuel cap lamp  
or a “check fuel cap” message come on,  
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The lamp or message  
can come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your  
vehicle.  
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler  
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap  
lamp  
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may  
or “check fuel  
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap lamp  
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up  
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and  
highway driving.  
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap lamp  
or “check fuel cap”  
message on may cause the lamp to turn on as well.  
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler  
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may  
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the  
correct genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. Remove  
fuel filler cap slowly. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure  
you or others.  
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,  
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system  
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may  
result in personal injury.  
Choosing the right fuel  
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum  
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that  
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is  
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel  
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.  
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic  
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that  
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to  
deteriorate more rapidly.  
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was  
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Octane recommendations  
Your vehicle is designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with  
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.  
We do not recommend the use of  
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that  
87  
(R+M)/2 METHOD  
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.  
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if  
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel  
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to  
prevent any engine damage.  
Fuel quality  
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability  
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”  
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to  
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized  
dealer.  
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It  
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel  
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane  
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and  
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of  
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter  
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved  
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.  
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when  
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the  
World-Wide Fuel Charter.  
Cleaner air  
Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to  
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right  
Fuel section.  
Running out of fuel  
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse  
effect on powertrain components.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If you have run out of fuel:  
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after  
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to  
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer  
than normal.  
Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the  
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1  
gallon (3.8L) may be required.  
The  
indicator may come on. For more information on the “check  
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights  
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY  
Measuring techniques  
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the  
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as  
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are  
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend  
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles  
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more  
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles  
(3,000 km–5,000 km).  
Filling the tank  
When the fuel gauge indicates empty, there is still a small reserve of fuel  
in the fuel system. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge  
indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the  
advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still  
present in the tank. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve  
varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range.  
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:  
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling;  
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.  
Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.  
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.  
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.  
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.  
Calculating fuel economy  
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading  
(in miles or kilometers).  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in  
gallons or liters).  
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record  
the current odometer reading.  
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer  
reading.  
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel  
economy:  
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.  
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total  
kilometers traveled.  
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city  
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel  
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records  
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel  
economy. In general, very hot or very cold temperatures give lower fuel  
economy.  
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits  
Since it is able to operate in electric mode and to collect braking energy,  
your hybrid vehicle will get better fuel economy in city driving than on  
the highway. This is contrary to conventional vehicles. However, many of  
the same actions that improve fuel economy in a conventional vehicle  
will also improve fuel economy in this vehicle.  
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to  
improve your fuel economy.  
Habits  
Avoid aggressive driving. Quick acceleration and deceleration decrease  
fuel economy.  
Drive at a smooth, constant speed. Excessive variation in pedal input  
causes more operating mode changes and reduces efficiency.  
Drive at reasonable speeds. Traveling at 60 mph [96 km/h] uses  
approximately 20% less fuel than traveling at 70 mph [112 km/h]).  
Minimize A/C and defroster usage. Selecting defrost, or defrost/floor  
mode on the climate control system will force the engine to run  
continuously, which reduces fuel economy. Selecting AUTO will  
typically force the engine to run continuously, unless ECON is  
selected.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Minimize temperature extremes when the vehicle is parked, for  
example by storing in a garage to avoid extreme cold in winter and  
extreme sun loads in summer. The high voltage battery operates more  
efficiently in moderate temperatures.  
Combine errands. Your vehicle is more fuel efficient when the engine  
is warm. Driving to your farthest destination first will warm the engine  
more quickly and may improve fuel economy for the rest of the trip.  
Maintenance  
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.  
Keep wheels properly aligned.  
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in  
this chapter.  
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the  
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks  
found in scheduled maintenance information.  
Conditions  
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy  
at any speed.  
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately  
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 300 lb [136 kg] of weight carried).  
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug  
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks, flags)  
may reduce fuel economy.  
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.  
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to  
driving on mountainous terrain.  
Close windows for high speed driving.  
EPA window sticker  
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your  
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.  
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy  
comparisons with other vehicles.  
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window  
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)  
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy  
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a  
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with  
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic  
converter and other emission control components continue to work  
properly:  
Use only the specified fuel listed.  
Avoid running out of fuel.  
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at  
high speeds.  
Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information  
performed according to the specified schedule.  
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance  
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle  
and to its emissions system.  
If other than Mazda or Mazda-authorized parts are used for maintenance  
replacements or for service of components affecting emission control,  
such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda Motor  
Corporation parts in performance and durability.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Illumination of the  
indicator, charging system warning light or the  
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of  
engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not  
working properly.  
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust  
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust  
system inspected and repaired immediately.  
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and  
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.  
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By  
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,  
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not  
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on  
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the  
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up  
specifications.  
Please consult your Warranty Information Booklet for complete  
emission warranty information.  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s  
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the  
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet  
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your  
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the  
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.  
Temporary malfunctions may cause the  
Examples are:  
indicator to illuminate.  
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler  
cap in this chapter.  
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.  
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank  
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the  
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any  
other temporary malfunctions present, the  
indicator should stay off  
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold  
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional  
vehicle service is required.  
If the  
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first  
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the  
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving  
with the  
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel  
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more  
costly repairs.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing  
Some state/provincial and local governments may have  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent  
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M  
test if the  
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned  
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission  
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle  
is considered not ready for I/M testing.  
If the  
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may  
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
description in this chapter.  
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the  
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may  
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the  
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position  
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the  
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if  
the indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for  
indicator blinks  
I/M testing.  
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system  
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the  
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting  
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:  
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20  
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.  
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the  
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The  
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,  
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If  
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will  
have to be repeated.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
BRAKE FLUID  
The fluid level will drop slowly as  
the brakes wear, and will rise when  
the brake components are replaced.  
Check fluid levels with the ignition  
in the RUN position. Fluid levels  
between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines  
are within the normal operating  
range; there is no need to add fluid.  
MAX  
MIN  
If the fluid levels are outside of the  
normal operating range the  
performance of your brake system could be compromised; seek service  
from your authorized dealer immediately.  
Brake pad replacement information  
The Regenerative Braking System checks the integrity of the brake  
system at times when the vehicle is parked. This is done by developing  
brake pressure for short periods of time. In order to change the brake  
pads, it is necessary to enter the Pad Service Mode. This will prevent  
brake pressure from being applied.  
To enter the Pad Service Mode, perform the following with the vehicle  
stationary:  
1. Place the vehicle in Park and turn ignition to the ON position.  
2. Apply the brake pedal.  
3. Turn the ignition OFF, then ON three times and then release the  
brake pedal. The total time elapsed for the three ignition cycles and  
brake release must be less than 3 seconds.  
The brake warning lamp will:  
flash as stored hydraulic pressure is released.  
remain illuminated once the pressure is completely released.  
flash if the brake is applied.  
To exit the Pad Service Mode:  
1. Apply the brake pedal and turn the ignition OFF then ON. This will  
cause brake pressure to be developed within the brake system. Once  
brake pressure is developed, the brake warning light will turn off.  
2. The Pad Service Mode will also be exited if the gear shift lever is  
moved from the (P) Park position, the vehicle is moved (wheels  
rotate) or the ignition is turned OFF.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Note: The brake system on this vehicle can only be bled at a authorized  
dealer.  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
Checking electronically controlled continuously variable  
transmission (eCVT)  
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information chapter for  
scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transaxle does not  
consume fluid. It is designed to be filled for life. However, the fluid level  
should be checked if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.  
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an  
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up  
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been  
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic  
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be  
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before  
checking.  
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal  
operating temperature.  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.  
3. With the parking brake engaged  
and your foot on the brake  
pedal, turn the key to the  
ACCESSORY position but do not  
start the engine. Turn the wheel  
to the left to gain access to the  
check plug.  
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and make sure that the engine  
is OFF by placing the ignition in the Lock position.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Using the hole in the splash  
shield, remove the check plug  
from the side of the  
transmission.  
If this is the first check of the  
transmission fluid, it may be  
necessary to remove the perforated  
section of the splash shield (as  
indicated on the splash shield).  
6. Be sure the engine has been stopped for at least 3 minutes before  
performing the fluid level check.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
7. The fluid level should be within  
1/4 inch (6 mm) of the plug  
threads.  
8. Replace the check plug.  
Adjusting eCVT fluid levels  
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of  
fluid used is indicated in the Maintenance product specifications and  
capacities section in this chapter.  
Use of a non-approved fluid may cause internal transaxle  
component damage.  
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the check port until the level is  
correct and fluid begins to run out of the transmission. If an overfill  
occurs, excess fluid should be removed by allowing the fluid to run out  
of the check port.  
A serious overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause  
damage.  
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or  
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission  
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.  
AIR FILTER  
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate  
intervals for changing the air filter element.  
When changing the air filter element, use only the Mazda air filter  
element listed. Refer to Mazda part numbers in this chapter.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is  
running.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Changing the air filter element  
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.  
2. Carefully separate the two  
halves of the air filter housing.  
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.  
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or  
debris and to ensure good sealing.  
5. Install a new air filter element.  
Be careful not to crimp the  
filter element edges between  
the air filter housing and cover.  
This could cause filter damage  
and allow unfiltered air to enter  
the engine if not properly  
seated.  
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.  
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe  
engine damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to  
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.  
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY COOLING FILTER (REAR A/C)  
MAINTENANCE  
The high voltage battery has a dedicated A/C cooling system which  
includes an air filter.  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate  
intervals for air filter.  
When changing the air filter element, use only the Mazda air filter  
element listed. Refer to Mazda part numbers in this chapter.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Changing the high voltage battery air filter element  
1. Remove access panel located in  
the rear cargo area on the  
driver’s side trim panel to  
expose the filter cover.  
2. Push the tabs (located on each  
side of filter cover) while pulling  
gently to remove filter cover.  
3. Install new filter and filter cover (note arrows indicating top side).  
4. Re-install the access panel into the trim panel.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
ENGINE DATA  
Engine  
2.3L I4 engine  
Cubic inches  
Required fuel  
Firing order  
140  
87 octane  
1-3-4-2  
Ignition system  
Spark plug gap  
Compression ratio  
Coil on plug  
0.049–0.053 inch (1.25–1.35mm)  
12.3:1  
Engine drivebelt routing  
2.3L I4 Engine  
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY DATA  
High Voltage Battery  
Battery chemistry  
Nominal Voltage  
Capacity  
Nickel Metal Hydride  
330 Volts  
6 Amp-hours  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE  
Safety Compliance Certification Label  
The National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration Regulations require  
that a Safety Compliance  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
DATE: XX/XX  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
Certification Label be affixed to a  
vehicle and prescribe where the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label may be located. The Safety  
Compliance Certification Label is  
located on the structure (B-Pillar)  
by the trailing edge of the driver’s  
door or the edge of the driver’s  
door.  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
XX  
INT TR  
XX  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
WB BRK  
TP/PS  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
XXX  
X
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
The vehicle identification number is  
located on the driver side  
instrument panel.  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Please note that in the graphic,  
XXXX is representative of your  
vehicle identification number.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following  
information:  
1. World manufacturer identifier  
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) /  
Restraint System  
3. Vehicle line, series, body type  
4. Engine type  
5. Check digit  
6. Model year  
7. Assembly plant  
8. Production sequence number  
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS  
You can find a  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
transmission/transaxle code on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label . The following table tells you  
which transmission or transaxle  
each code represents.  
DATE: XX/XX  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
XX  
INT TR  
XX  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
WB BRK  
TP/PS  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
XXX  
X
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
Description  
Code  
Electronically controlled continuously variable  
transmission, eCVT  
H
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
CELL PHONES  
Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:  
WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,  
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices  
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a  
number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s  
hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be  
distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is  
unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area  
before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this  
warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands  
free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other  
electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead,  
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.  
In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using  
cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased  
concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump  
environment.  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION  
Why maintain your vehicle?  
This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your  
vehicle. Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major  
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and  
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or  
trade it.  
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is  
performed and that the materials used meet Mazda engineering  
specifications. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this  
guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of  
maintenance. Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with  
the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in  
this guide.  
Your Mazda dealer, or Mazda Quality Care Center has factory trained  
technicians who can perform the required maintenance using genuine  
Mazda parts. They are committed to meeting your service needs and to  
assuring your continuing satisfaction.  
Protecting your investment  
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of  
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To ensure the proper  
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is  
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated  
intervals.  
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex  
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using  
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s  
important to rely upon your Mazda dealership to properly diagnose and  
repair your vehicle.  
Mazda Motor Corporation has recommended maintenance intervals for  
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.  
Mazda Motor Corporation relies upon this testing to determine the most  
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your  
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against  
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance  
information.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
Mazda strongly recommends the use of genuine Mazda replacement  
parts. Parts other than Mazda or Mazda authorized remanufactured parts  
that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of  
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine  
Mazda Motor Corporation parts in performance and durability. It is the  
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please  
consult your Warranty Information Booklet for complete warranty  
information.  
Non-Mazda approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory  
recommended maintenance. In fact, Mazda Motor Corporation  
recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically  
recommended by Mazda for a particular application.  
Oil, fluids and flushing  
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic  
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid  
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of  
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected  
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians  
at your Mazda Dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be  
changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.  
Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems  
during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only  
with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the  
system, or using a Mazda-approved flushing chemical.  
Engine Emissions label  
Emissions information appears on the Engine Emissions label on the  
underside of the hood. This decal identifies engine displacement and  
provides certain engine specifications.  
Any modification of the emissions control system could create liability  
under federal law (U.S.) if made prior to sale and registration, under the  
laws of some states if made thereafter. Further, federal law prohibits  
vehicle manufacturers, dealers and other persons engaged in the  
business of repairing, servicing, selling, leasing or trading motor vehicles  
as well as fleet operations from knowingly removing or rendering an  
emissions control system inoperative after sale and delivery to an  
ultimate purchaser. In Canada, modifications of the emissions control  
system could create liability under applicable federal or provincial laws.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
Genuine Mazda Parts and Service  
When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mazda  
dealership for all your vehicle’s needs.  
Get the most from your service and maintenance visits  
There are a lot of reasons why visiting your Mazda Dealership for all  
your service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running  
great.  
Convenience  
Many Dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make  
your service visit more convenient. How’s that for quality service?  
Factory-trained Technicians  
Mazda service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored  
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of  
your vehicle. Ask your Dealership about the training and certification  
their technicians have received.  
Factory Authorized Systems Checks  
In the event your vehicle experiences a component related concern,  
please contact your Mazda dealership. The Mazda Motor Corporation  
Trained Technicians who work at Mazda dealerships are specifically  
trained to understand your vehicle.  
A proper repair begins with a thorough system check. Factory  
Authorized Systems Checks can ONLY be found at a Mazda dealership. In  
some circumstances, the Technician may need to request your  
authorization to perform additional operations to determine the final  
diagnosis. The Technician’s goal is to ensure that your vehicle is fixed  
right the first time, at the best value to you.  
The following list represents several of the Factory Authorized Systems  
Checks available at participating Mazda Dealerships:  
Climate Control  
Check Engine Light  
All Wheel Drive/Four-Wheel Drive  
Automatic Transmission  
Engine Cooling/Cabin Heating  
Suspension/Steering  
Charge/Start/Battery  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
Wheel Alignment  
Brakes  
And when your vehicle needs replacement parts, insist that only parts  
meeting Mazda Motor Corporation’s specifications are used. Genuine  
Mazda branded parts meet these specifications. You can find them at  
your Mazda Dealership. Look for the following brand logos to ensure the  
parts installed on your vehicle meet Mazda Motor Corporation  
Specifications.  
Genuine Mazda Replacement Parts  
Mazda dealerships stock Mazda branded replacement parts. These parts  
meet or exceed Mazda Motor Corporation’s specifications, and we stand  
behind them. Maintenance parts installed at your Mazda dealership carry  
a nationwide, 12 months, 12,000 mile parts and labor limited warranty.  
Your dealer can give you details.  
Value Shopping for Your Vehicle’s Maintenance Needs  
Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and  
light repair automotive services. With factory-trained technicians, and  
one-stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire  
rotations to repairs like brake service, check out the value your Mazda  
dealers can offer.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW?  
Owner Checks and Services  
Refer to Mileage Intervals for Additional Checks and Services  
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed  
by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated. Service  
information and supporting specifications are provided in this Owner’s  
Manual.  
Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer  
or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service  
advice. The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered  
by warranties so you may be charged for labor, parts or lubricants used.  
Maximum Oil Change Interval  
12 months, 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 200 hours of engine operation.  
Mazda Premium Gold Engine Coolant change interval  
6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km) - change Mazda Premium Gold Engine Coolant (whichever comes first)  
After initial change - change Mazda Premium Gold Engine Coolant every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km).  
Check every month  
Check function of all interior and exterior lights  
Check tires for wear and correct air pressure, including spare tire  
Check windshield washer fluid level  
Check engine oil level  
Check every six months  
Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function  
Check that externally mounted spare tire is properly stowed (tight)  
Check parking brake for proper operation  
Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, seat belt) for operation  
Check cooling system fluid level and coolant strength  
Check low voltage (underhood) battery connections and clean if necessary  
Check washer spray, wiper operation and clean all wiper blades (replace as necessary)  
Check and lubricate all hinges, latches and outside locks. Inspect for correct operation  
Check and lubricate door rubber weatherstrips. Inspect for excessive wear  
Check and clean body and door drain holes. Inspect for clogs and obstructions  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
Multi-point Inspection  
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important that you have  
the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify any  
potential issue before there are any problems. Mazda Motor Corporation  
suggests the following multi-point inspection to be performed at every  
scheduled maintenance as the way to ensure your vehicle keeps running  
right.  
Multi-point inspection - Recommended at every visit  
Check and top up fluid levels: brake, engine coolant recovery reservoir, motor/electronics reservoir and window washer.  
Inspect tires for wear and correct air pressure.  
Check exhaust system for leaks, damage, loose parts and foreign materials.  
Check low voltage (underhood) battery performance.  
Check operation of horn, exterior lamps, turn signals and hazard warning lights.  
Check radiator, coolers and heater and air conditioning hoses.  
Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation.  
Check windshield for cracks, chips and pitting.  
Inspect for oil and fluid leaks.  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter and elements.  
Inspect half-shaft dust boots.  
Check shocks, struts and other suspension components for leaks and damage.  
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG  
The following section contains the “Normal Schedule”. This schedule is  
presented at specific mileage (kilometer) intervals with exceptions  
noted.  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THE WEB  
To learn more about the importance of routine and dealer-performed  
maintenance on your vehicle, please visit the Mazda Customer Service  
Web site. You’ll also find important warranty information, customer  
assistance, technical expertise, frequently asked questions and much  
more. The Web site location is: www.genuineservice.com.  
Then go to the vehicles and services pick at the Web site.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
U.S. AND CANADIAN SCHEDULE  
5,000 miles (8,000 km)  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
10,000 miles (16,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
20,000 miles (32,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
30,000 miles (48,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
Replace engine air filter  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
40,000 miles (64,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
50,000 miles (80,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
60,000 miles (96,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
Replace engine air filter  
MILEAGE:  
70,000 miles (112,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
80,000 miles (128,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
90,000 miles (144,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
Replace engine air filter  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
100,000 miles (160,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
Replace fuel filter  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
Replace engine coolant and Motor/electronics coolant (see  
Mazda Premium Gold Coolant Change Record)  
Inspect accessory drive belt  
Replace spark plugs  
110,000 miles (176,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
120,000 miles (192,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
Replace engine air filter  
MILEAGE:  
130,000 miles (208,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter, replace if necessary  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
140,000 miles (224,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and  
hoses and parking brake  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
Inspect engine and Motor/electronics cooling system and  
hoses  
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped, half-  
shafts, driveshaft and ball joints  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
150,000 miles (240,000 km)  
Change engine oil and replace oil filter  
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth  
Rotate tires  
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter  
Replace engine air filter  
Replace engine coolant and Motor/electronics coolant (see  
Mazda Premium Gold Coolant Change Record)  
Replace accessory drive belt (if not replaced in the last  
100,000 miles)  
Inspect PCV valve for flow and replace, if required  
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only)  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS  
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier  
Every 5,000 miles, 6 months or 200 Change engine oil and replace filter  
hours of engine operation  
(whichever comes first)  
Every 5,000 miles Inspect tires and rotate  
Extensive Idling and/or Low Speed Driving for Long Distances as in Heavy  
Commercial Use Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Vehicle or Livery. This  
operating condition is for Extensive Maximum A/C or Heater Operation  
with engine on in the above listed usage.  
Every 5,000 miles, 6 months or 200 Change engine oil and replace filter  
hours of engine operation  
(whichever comes first)  
Every 5,000 miles Inspect tires and rotate  
Every 60,000 miles Replace spark plugs  
As required Replace cabin air filter, if equipped  
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads  
Every 5,000 miles, 6 months or 200 Change engine oil and replace filter  
hours of engine operation  
(whichever comes first)  
Inspect tires and rotate  
As required Replace cabin air filter, if equipped  
Replace engine air filter  
Replace high voltage battery A/C air filter  
Off-road operation  
Every 5,000 miles, 6 months or 200 Change engine oil and replace filter  
hours of engine operation  
(whichever comes first)  
Inspect tires and rotate  
As required Replace cabin air filter, if equipped  
Replace engine air filter  
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
Special Operating Conditions Log  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
Special Operating Conditions Log  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
DEALER VALIDATION:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
RO#:  
DATE:  
P&A CODE:  
MILEAGE:  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Maintenance Section  
MAZDA PREMIUM GOLD ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD  
Mazda Premium Gold Engine Coolant  
6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km) (whichever comes first) - change Mazda Premium Gold Engine Coolant and  
motor/electrical coolant.  
After initial change - change Mazda Premium Gold Engine Coolant every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)  
Current mileage goes here =>  
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles  
Next change due at this mileage =>  
Or  
Dealer Stamp  
+ 50,000  
Today’s date goes here =>  
Add 3 years  
+ 00 / 00 / 03  
Date of next change =>  
whichever comes first  
P & A CODE  
R.O.#  
Current mileage goes here =>  
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles  
Next change due at this mileage =>  
Or  
Dealer Stamp  
+ 50,000  
Today’s date goes here =>  
Add 3 years  
+ 00 / 00 / 03  
Date of next change =>  
whichever comes first  
P & A CODE  
R.O.#  
Current mileage goes here =>  
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles  
Next change due at this mileage =>  
Or  
Dealer Stamp  
+ 50,000  
Today’s date goes here =>  
Add 3 years  
+ 00 / 00 / 03  
Date of next change =>  
whichever comes first  
P & A CODE  
R.O.#  
Current mileage goes here =>  
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles  
Next change due at this mileage =>  
Or  
Dealer Stamp  
+ 50,000  
Today’s date goes here =>  
Add 3 years  
+ 00 / 00 / 03  
Date of next change =>  
whichever comes first  
P & A CODE  
R.O.#  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
acid, treating emergencies .....256  
jumping a disabled  
Accessory delay ..........................65  
Air cleaner filter ...............278–280  
Air conditioning  
automatic temperature  
control system ..........................42  
Airbag supplemental restraint  
system ........................120, 129, 131  
and child safety seats ............122  
description ..............120, 129, 131  
disposal ....................................135  
driver airbag ............122, 130, 133  
indicator light .........128, 131, 134  
operation .................122, 130, 133  
passenger airbag .....122, 130, 133  
side airbag ...............................129  
battery .............................222, 227  
maintenance-free ....................256  
servicing ..................................256  
Belt-Minder.............................115  
Booster seats .............................136  
Brakes ........................................187  
anti-lock ...........................187–188  
anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
warning light ...........................188  
fluid, checking and adding ....275  
fluid, refill capacities ..............281  
fluid, specifications .................281  
lubricant specifications ..........281  
parking ....................................189  
shift interlock ..........................191  
All Wheel Drive (AWD),  
driving off road .........................194  
Bulbs ............................................53  
Ambulance packages ..................15  
Anti-lock brake system  
(see Brakes) ......................187–188  
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....281  
Cargo area shade ........................83  
Cell phone warning ...................286  
Anti-theft system ........................93  
Audio system (see Radio) .........27  
Automatic transaxle  
fluid, adding ............................276  
fluid, checking ........................276  
Child safety restraints ..............136  
child seat belts .......................136  
Child safety seats ......................139  
attaching with tether straps ..143  
in front seat ............................140  
in rear seat ..............................140  
Automatic transmission  
driving an automatic  
overdrive .................................193  
fluid, refill capacities ..............281  
fluid, specification ..................281  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....35  
Auxiliary power point .................61  
Child safety seats - booster  
seats ...........................................136  
Cleaning your vehicle  
engine compartment ..............243  
instrument panel ....................245  
interior .....................................245  
Mazda car care products .......246  
plastic parts ............................244  
washing ....................................242  
Axle  
lubricant specifications ..........281  
refill capacities ........................281  
B
Battery .......................................256  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
waxing .....................................242  
wheels ......................................243  
wiper blades ............................244  
Climate control (see Air  
conditioning or Heating) ............42  
Compass, electronic ....................66  
calibration .................................67  
set zone adjustment .................66  
Emergencies, roadside  
jump-starting ..................222, 227  
Emission control system ..........272  
Engine ........................................283  
cleaning ...................................243  
idle speed control ...................256  
lubrication specifications .......281  
refill capacities ........................281  
service points ..........................250  
Console ........................................60  
Controls  
Engine oil ..................................253  
checking and adding ..............253  
dipstick ....................................253  
filter, specifications ................255  
recommendations ...................255  
refill capacities ........................281  
specifications ..........................281  
power seat .................................99  
steering column ........................72  
Coolant  
checking and adding ......258–260  
refill capacities ................263, 281  
specifications ..........................281  
Event data recording ..................14  
Exhaust fumes ..........................185  
Cruise control .............................69  
Cruise control  
(see Speed control) ....................69  
F
Customer  
Assistance ..................231–232, 235  
Fluid capacities .........................281  
Foglamps .....................................48  
D
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles  
Daytime running lamps  
driving off road .......................195  
preparing to drive your  
(see Lamps) ................................49  
vehicle .....................................190  
Dipstick  
automatic transmission  
fluid ..........................................276  
engine oil .................................253  
Fuel ............................................264  
calculating fuel  
economy ............................75, 269  
cap ...........................................266  
capacity ...................................281  
choosing the right fuel ...........267  
comparisons with EPA fuel  
economy estimates .................271  
detergent in fuel .....................268  
filling your vehicle  
with fuel ..................264, 266, 269  
filter, specifications ................264  
Driving under special  
conditions ..................194, 196, 199  
sand .........................................197  
snow and ice ...........................200  
through water .................198, 201  
E
Electronic message center .........74  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
fuel pump/high voltage  
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)  
testing ........................................274  
shut-off switches ....................202  
improving fuel economy ........269  
octane rating ...................268, 283  
quality ......................................268  
running out of fuel .................268  
safety information relating to  
automotive fuels .....................264  
Instrument panel  
cleaning ...................................245  
cluster ........................................20  
lighting up panel and  
interior .......................................50  
location of components ............20  
Fuses ..................................204–205  
J
G
Jump-starting your  
vehicle ................................222, 227  
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............266  
Gas mileage  
(see Fuel economy) .................269  
K
Keys .......................................86, 94  
positions of the ignition .........182  
Gauges .........................................25  
H
L
Hazard flashers .........................202  
Head restraints ...................97, 101  
Lamps  
bulb replacement  
specifications chart ..................53  
daytime running light ...............49  
fog lamps ...................................48  
headlamps .................................47  
headlamps, flash to pass ..........49  
instrument panel, dimming .....50  
interior lamps .....................52–54  
replacing bulbs .........................54  
Headlamps ...................................47  
aiming ........................................50  
bulb specifications ....................53  
daytime running lights .............49  
flash to pass ..............................49  
high beam .................................49  
replacing bulbs .........................54  
turning on and off ....................47  
Lane change indicator  
Heating  
(see Turn signal) ........................51  
heating and air conditioning  
system .......................................42  
Liftgate ..................................82, 89  
Hood ..........................................249  
Lights, warning and indicator ....20  
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........188  
I
Load limits .................................170  
Loading instructions .................176  
Ignition ...............................182, 283  
Infant seats  
(see Safety seats) .....................139  
Locks  
childproof ..................................87  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
doors ..........................................87  
Lubricant specifications ...........281  
Lug nuts ....................................221  
Luggage rack ...............................84  
Power door locks ........................87  
Power mirrors .............................68  
Power point .................................61  
Power Seats .................................99  
Power steering ..........................190  
Power Windows ...........................64  
M
Manual transmission  
fluid capacities ........................281  
lubricant specifications ..........281  
Preparing to drive  
your vehicle ...............................190  
Message center ...........................74  
english/metric button ...............78  
system check button ................76  
warning messages .....................79  
R
Radio ............................................27  
Relays ........................................204  
Mirrors ...................................65, 68  
automatic dimming rearview  
mirror ........................................65  
fold away ...................................68  
heated ........................................68  
side view mirrors (power) .......68  
Remote entry system .................88  
illuminated entry ......................91  
locking/unlocking doors .....88–89  
opening the trunk .....................89  
panic alarm ...............................90  
replacement/additional  
Moon roof ....................................73  
Motorcraft parts ........................264  
transmitters ...............................91  
replacing the batteries .............90  
Roof rack .....................................84  
N
S
Navigation system .......................41  
Safety Canopy ...........................130  
Safety defects, reporting ..........241  
O
Octane rating ............................268  
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................253  
Safety restraints ........105, 109–113  
Belt-Minder...........................115  
extension assembly ................114  
for adults .........................110–112  
for children .....................135–136  
Occupant Classification  
P
Parking brake ............................189  
Sensor ......................................107  
seat belt maintenance ............114  
warning light and chime ........115  
Passenger Occupant  
Classification Sensor .................107  
Power distribution box  
(see Fuses) ...............................207  
Safety seats for children ..........139  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Safety Compliance  
Steering wheel  
controls ......................................72  
tilting .........................................59  
Certification Label ....................284  
Satellite Radio Information ........38  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Guide .........................................287  
General Maintenance  
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................59  
Information .............................287  
Normal Scheduled  
Maintenance and Log .............292  
Special Operating  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS)  
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....165  
Tires ...................................149–150  
alignment ................................158  
care ..........................................154  
changing ..........................213, 215  
checking the pressure ............154  
inflating ...................................151  
label .........................................164  
replacing ..................................155  
rotating ....................................158  
safety practices .......................157  
sidewall information ...............159  
snow tires and chains ............170  
spare tire .........................211, 213  
terminology .............................151  
tire grades ...............................150  
treadwear ........................149, 154  
Conditions ...............................299  
What Maintenance Schedule  
Should You Follow? ................291  
Seat Belt Maintenance .............114  
Seat belts (see Safety  
restraints) ..................105, 109–113  
Seats ............................................97  
child safety seats ....................139  
heated ......................................100  
SecuriLock passive anti-theft  
system ..........................................93  
Servicing your vehicle ..............247  
Side-curtain airbags system  
(if equipped) .....................131, 133  
Towing .......................................176  
recreational towing .................181  
trailer towing ..........................176  
wrecker ....................................229  
Snowplowing ...............................15  
Spark plugs, specifications .......283  
Special notice  
ambulance conversions ............15  
utility-type vehicles ..................15  
Transmission .............................191  
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....191  
fluid, checking and adding  
(automatic) .............................276  
fluid, refill capacities ..............281  
lubricant specifications ..........281  
Specification chart,  
lubricants ...................................281  
Speed control ..............................69  
Trunk ...........................................89  
Turn signal ..................................51  
Starting your vehicle ........182–184  
jump starting ..................222, 227  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
V
Water, Driving through .............201  
Windows  
power .........................................64  
rear wiper/washer .....................59  
Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN) ..........................................284  
Vehicle loading ..........................170  
Ventilating your vehicle ...........185  
Windshield washer fluid and  
wipers ..........................................58  
checking and adding fluid .....251  
liftgate reservoir .....................251  
replacing wiper blades ...........252  
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......20  
Washer fluid ..............................251  
Wrecker towing .........................229  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Krell Industries Stereo Amplifier Surround Sound Preamp Processor User Manual
Kyocera Telescope KD 200 54 P User Manual
Learning Resources Webcam LER 2240 User Manual
Lenovo Laptop 3000 G430 User Manual
LevelOne Network Router GSW 2490TXM User Manual
Lux Products Thermostat T10 1143SA User Manual
Makita Chainsaw DCS 9010 User Manual
Metra Electronics Automobile Accessories 99 4700 User Manual
Metz Camera Accessories Camera Flash Light User Manual
Midland Radio Two Way Radio GXT900 Series User Manual